Home

Planet Technology SGSW-24040R User's Manual

1. 3 T EF _ R ak d oT te Sart de be 4 o WDA i A ee Meter amp Communication gt u MU A A awn Lag Sar A AO HE um E ai User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2008 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incompl
2. 802 1X Port Configuration 1 Authorized 502 14 Disabled 2 Authorized 502 1 Disabled 3 Authorized 502 1 Disabled 4 Authorized 502 1 Disabled 5 Authornzed 502 1 Disabled b Authorized 502 1 Disabled Authorized 502 1 Disabled a Authorized 502 1 Disabled 4 Authorized 502 1 Disabled 0 Authorized 602 1 Disabled Figure 4 10 8 802 1x Port Configuration Jl LLL 3 Create user data That step are different of Local Authenticate the establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2000 Server and then 154 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Y Documents Documen Active Directory Domains and Trusts Active Directory Sites and Services Active Directory Users and Computers Component Services Computer Management Configure Your Server Data Sources ODBC Distributed File System Domain Controller Security Policy Domain Security Policy Event viewer Licensing Wilco Lpz Local Security Policy aOR ia ss Pertormanee Routing and Remote Access Accessories Services Programs Telnet Server Administration Him E E BP by a Sia ER Administrative Tools Documents E Snagit 7 Startup Settings wink AR Search com l Internet Explorer Help Outlook Express Run Shut Down Snagit Capture Preview
3. Figure 4 10 14 158 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application 4 11 1 Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined for this Managed Switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined a The maximum number of AC
4. System Information Contact Name WES 24040 Location MAC Address DO 30 4f 24 04 5b System Date 1970 01 01 00 02 33 0000 System Uptime Od 00 02 33 Sofware Software Version v1 ObO6Dl6 4 Software Date 2009 05 22 03 29 43 0000 Auto refresh L Figure 4 2 1 System Information page screenshot Description The system contact configured in SNMP System Information System Contact The system name configured in SNMP System Information System Name The system location configured in SNMP System Information System Location The MAC Address of this switch The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any The period of time the device has been operational The switch ID SGSW Series Only The software version of the switch The date when the switch software was produced Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals 48 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R _Refresh_ Click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone For the SGSW series stackable switch the System Information page add additional column to identify the current switch ID of stack member switches in a stack group The screen as below appears System Information Contact Name SGSW 24040 Location MAC Address 00 30 42 24 24 cl System Date 2008 09 04 14 25 17 0800 System Uptime Od 02 22 25
5. 194 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 15 2 Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 15 1 appears ICMP Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 15 1 ICMP Ping page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you had setup the correct gateway IP address After field the parameter and press Start to execute the Ping function The Ping result shows at the next tabl ICMP Ping Output PING server 192 168 100 1 64 bytes from 192 168 100 1 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 100 1 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 100 1 icmp_seq 2 time 0ms 64 bytes from 192 168 100 1 icmp_seq 3 time 10ms 64 bytes from 192 168 100 1 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets receved 5 OK 0 bad New Ping 195 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 16 Stacking SGSW 24040 SGSW 2404
6. 2 Client O 000000000 3 Seve O CO COO 4 Network O O O O O 5 Guest O O O O 6 ORORO RORORORORORORSG T Oocoo0ooccecxdeo oo de de e Oo de e OO00 OOOO OOOO O O O Cancel Wizard Figure 4 11 4 Set up Port Policies page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Policy ID Frames that hit this ACE are set to match this specific policy e Port Members A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each Policy ID To include a port in a policy member click the radio button 170 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 3 3 Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control The screen in Figure 4 11 5 appears a STEP 1 Selecting the Network Application Type Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control by selecting the network application type for your rule o Common Servers OoncP Dos Ort OHTP Omar OONFS OOPop3 OsamBA OSMTP OOTELNET TFTP o Instant Messaging O Google Talk CO MSN Messenger C Yahoo Messenger o User Definition C Ethemet Type CIUDP Pot OTCP Port o Others Figure 4 11 5 Set up Typical network Application Rules page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Common Servers Indicates the common servers that applie
7. Figure 4 10 9 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting path Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed Figure 4 10 10 TsInternetUser Properties screen 155 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server 4 10 7 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1X client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5 you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Goto Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window b 3COM 3C940 Status General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed
8. If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 143 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 10 2 802 1X System Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication A central server the RADIUS server determines whether the user is allowed access to the network MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X software installed on his system The Managed Switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the RADIUS server Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The 802 1X System Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 3 appears 802 1X Configuration system Configuration RADIUS IP RADIUS Secret Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period 3600 seconds EAP Timeout 30 seconds Age Period aooo seconds Hold Time seconds Figure 4 10 3 802 1X Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates if 802 1X an
9. The RSTP Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 7 8 appears RSTP Bridge Status Root YLAN ID Active Ports Bridge ID O es Topology Flag 347 69 00 30 4f 44 04 5b6 32769 00 30 4f 24 04 5b Auto refresh L Figure 4 7 8 RSTP Bridge Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with this Bridge instance This is also a link to the RSTP Detailed Bridge Status e Active Ports The number switch ports active in the RSTP bridge instance aggregated ports count only as one e Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance e Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge e Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role e Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance 112 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 7 3 RSTP Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current RSTP port configurations and possibly change them as well This page contain settings for aggregations and physical ports The aggregation settings are stack global The RSTP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The RSTP Port Configuration screen in Figure 4
10. Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 1024 ACL Lookup Description Clear all ACL counters Syntax ACL Clear 276 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 10 MAC Address Table Command MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show port1 Mac state SWITCH gt mac configuration 1 MAC Age Time 300 Mac Add Description Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 217 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Example Add Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in port1 and vid1 SWITCH gt mac add 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Delete Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in vid1 SWITCH gt mac delete 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1
11. This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the WGSW SGSW Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login password The factory default password as following and the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Password admin COM1_115200 HyperTerminal Sele File Edit View Call Transfer Help RAM B8xBBB000BO 0xB044800000 10x0002c340 0x03fe1000 available FLASH Ox86000000 Ox80800000 256 blocks of Bx00010000 bytes each Executing boot script in 3 000 seconds enter C to abort RedBoot gt memtest Testing 4x00B02c340 0xB3Fe1000 Completed no errors RedBoot gt fis load managed RedBoot gt go Welcome to PLANET WGOSW 24640 Command Line Interface Port Numbers 21 41 61 81 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 111 31 oi Zi i 21111131191 111119211231 H HE AH AH A EA E E 4 4 Password Type help or to get help SWITCH gt 115200 5 N 1 Figure 5 1 WGSW SGSW Managed Switch Console Login screen 208 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface Configure IP address
12. default Show shared secret Default Setting empty Example Set authentication key 123abc in switch with the RADIUS server SWITCH gt dot1x secret 123abc Dot1x Authenticate Description 267 Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process Syntax Dot1x Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately Dot1x Re authentication Description Set or show Reauthentication mode Syntax Dot1x Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show reauthentication mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable re authentication function User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt dot1x reauthentication enable Dot1x Period Description Set or show the period between reauthentications Syntax Dot1x Period lt reauth_period gt Parameters 268 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R lt reauth_period gt Period between reauthentications 1 3600 seconds default Show reauthentication period Default Setting 3600 Example Set period re authentication time in 3000 seconds swircHdotts period 3000 Dot1x Timeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Dot1x Timeout
13. 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 296 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R APPENDEX B GLOSSARY ACE ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL ACL is an acronym for Access Control List lt is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls Aggregation Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link sp
14. Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled bI O 1 AL cele 4 afele no ei ped pari ed Dea ei ed pri ei ed arl el e ei lo ujulu u o a a a a aaa aa eE J222 12 2 21212212 22122122 12123121212 47 474 474 7474 74 7 47 47 4 4 4 4 A ey as O O AA O O O O Cc lt Fermit Fermit nots intone Disabled Disabled Fermit Disabled Disabled Uisabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Oisablegd Disabled Oisabled Disabled Save Refresh Figure 4 11 14 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row 179 Policy ID Action Rate Limiter ID Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Select whether forwarding is p
15. Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Puerard A 41 4 FPraklacl aa Down Auto Down Auto Down Auto BOO Down Auto Down Auto Down Auto Down Auto Down Auto A A 1 MEA MA amp 10 Mr Ppe eeee0800e0000000000080808080 i L Down Auto Down Auto Pp Down Auto Lu Down Auto Es E Down Auto mn Down Auto 1Stfdx Auto es 0 Down Auto m m Down Auto mo Down Auto bh O Down Auto Pi Down Auto a O E E KK KR E KK KR KK KK OK OM S ARK KR KK KKK KK KA KKK KK KK AK J J Fira Punta Figure 4 4 1 Port Configuration page screenshot 11 The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Link e Current Link Speed e Configured Link Speed e Flow Control e Maximum Frame e Excessive Collision Mode e Power Control User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Description This is the logical port number for this row The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Provides the current link speed of the port Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode e Auto Speed Setup Auto negotiation e 10 half Force sets 10Mbps Half Duplex mode e 10 Full Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode e 100 half Force sets 100Mbps
16. Mi MGB LB10 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver WDM Single mode TX 1550nm RX 1310nm 10km It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Managed Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not supported the Managed Switch will not recognize it Before connect the other Managed Switches workstation or Media Converter 1 Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model gt Toconnectto 1000Base SX SFP transceiver use the Multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnectto 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use the Single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force is needed Remove the transceiver module Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through
17. Port Mirroring UP Link source Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 4 4 Port Mirror application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring 82 Mirror Port Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The Port Mirror Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 5 and Figure 4 4 6 appears a WGSW Standalone Switch Port Mirror Configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled eo I I I 1 2 J 4 5 E E o g Ll 1 mud i ees Figure 4 4 5 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Portto mirror to e Port e Mode Description Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled disables mirroring The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Select mirror mode e Rxonly Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored e Txonly Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored e Disabled Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored e Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to th
18. This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The screen in Figure 4 2 13 appears Configuration Upload Browse Url Figure 4 2 13 Configuration Upload page screenshot Configuration Upload Upload the existed configuration file to the Managed Switch The configuration file had been saved at the local machine already Configuration Upload 1 Click the Browse button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved configuration 57 2 3 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Choose file Look inc ES Configueation Es Mi GE y Maa E hy Recent Decumerts Diesking My Piatek File par e Fies uf fewer Al Fieri __ Cancel Figure 4 2 14 Windows file selection menu popup Select on the configuration file then click Upload the bottom of the browser shows the upload status After down the main screen appears Transfer Completed 58 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 2 9 Factory Default The Factory Reset button can reset the VDSL2 Switch back to the factory default mode Be aware that the entire configuration will be reset include the IP address of the VDSL2 Switch Once the Factory Reset item is pressed the screen in Figure 4 2 15 appears Factory Default Are you sure you want to
19. User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member d Leave Group Leave Grou Stop Timer Join Group d Send Report Start Timer 4 S d Recei lt sirt Timer Delaying Member eroi esses Idle Member eport Receive Stop Timer C Timer Expried o Es Send report Figure 4 9 4 IGMP State Transitions E IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 135 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 9 2 IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stac
20. e Querier Transmit The number of Transmitted Querier e Querier Receive The number of Received Querier e V1 Reports Receive The number of Received V1 Reports e V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports e V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports e V2 Leave Receive The number of Received V2 Leave 138 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 9 5 Multicast Address Table The Multicast Address Table screen in Figure 4 9 8 appears Multicast Address Table start from VLAN and MAC address with entries per page Auto refresh L Port Members no more entries ATA res Tyve vian wae address erula ekine C e e a Figure 4 9 8 Multicast Address Table page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the entry e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry 139 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 10 IEEE 802 1X Network Access Control Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests
21. lt eapol_timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 255 seconds default Show retransmission timeout Default Setting 30 Example Set re transmission time in 60 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x timeout 60 Dot1x Statistics Description Show 802 1X statistics Syntax Dot1x Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius 269 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show RADIUS statistics default Show all statistics Dot1x Clients Description Set or show the maximum number of allowed clients for MAC based ports Syntax Dot1x Clients lt port_list gt all lt client_cnt gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all lt client_cnt gt MAC based authentication Set maximum number of clients allowed on a port all Allow all new clients lt client_cnt gt A number gt 1 default Show current maximum Default Setting All Dot1x Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Dot1x Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks for activity on a MAC address that succeeded authentication default Show age time Default Setting
22. 1 16 or local switch lt mst_elect_prio gt Master election priority 1 4 1 gt Highest master probability Example Set low priority for switch2 SWITCH gt stack master priority 2 4 Stack Master Reelect Description Force master reelection ignoring master time Syntax Stack Master Reelect 287 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Stack Select Description Set or show the selected switch ID Syntax Stack Select lt sid gt all Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 default Show SID Example Select switch2 to management switch2 SWITCH gt stack select 2 Stack SID Swap Description Swap SID values used to identify two switches Syntax Stack SID Swap lt sid gt lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Example Swap switch ID 1 and 2 SWITCH gt stack sid swap 2 1 Stack SID Delect Description Delete SID assignment and associated configuration Syntax 288 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Stack SID Delete lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Stack SID Asign Description Assign SID and associated configuration to switch SID must be unassigned switch must be present and switch must not already be assigned to a SID Syntax Stack SID Assign lt sid gt lt mac_addr gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 lt mac_addr gt MA
23. 100 0 Mbps Activity Received 146 935 760 110 212 126 Figure 4 10 11 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type 156 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 3COM 30940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks Enable IEEE 602 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP FEAF 4 MO5 Challenge Protected EAP FEAF Smart Card or other Certificate Authenticate az computer when computer information ls available Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable Figure 4 10 12 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue er DA Talija Ea i i Wireless sebwork Commectian i Chek here to enter your user name and password For the retwork PLANET AP Figure 4 10 13 157 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Wireless Hetwork Connection User name test Password Logon domar FAE LOCAL
24. Color Function LED Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LNK ACT If L10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps 10 100 Orange Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LNK ACT Off If 1000 LNK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps If 1000 LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down 21 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R MM 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R LED indication gt PLANET scsw 24040 Networking amp Communication SIX 2 Console STX 1 a Master y 517 1 O o e s In gt gt 115200 N 8 1 Reset PWR on AC A 0 1000 10 100 Figure 2 4 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R LED panel Function Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure Master Green
25. E E El El E El El E El Y E E El E Y E E El El El El E El Ei E Figure 4 14 1 LLDP Configuration page screenshot E LLDP Parameters Object Description e Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds 188 e Tx Hold e Tx Delay e Tx Reinit User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with
26. MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address XX XX XX XX XX XX lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Lookup state of Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 SWITCH gt mac lookup 00 30 4f 01 01 02 278 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 1000000 default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set agetime value in 30 SWITCH gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port 279 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R swircHiemac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC
27. TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining 164 e IP Protocol Value e IP TTL e IP Fragment e IP Option e SIP Filter e SIP Address e SIP Mask e DIP Filter User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE e zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry e non zero Pv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame e No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry e Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the options flag setting for this ACE e No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry e Yes IPv4 frame
28. The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save 70 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address e Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index key are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 6 appears SNMPv3 Groups Configuration public default_ro_qroup private detault_rw_group public default_ro_ group private deftault_rw_group default user detault_rw_group Figure 4 3 6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are e v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 e v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c e usm User based Security Model USM e Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII
29. di Caution Ensure the power switch in the OFF position before connect the DC mire SSS SSS SSS Figure 2 10 Rear Panel of WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040R Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of WGSW 24040R or SGSW 24040R Warning ensure that the power switch in the OFF position and the DC power is OFF 25 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 2 Install the Switch This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step2 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 10 Figure 2 10 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop Step3 Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Section 4 and Specification Step4 Connect the Managed Switch to network devices Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the fro
30. efe efe o ele o 0 1190 110 0 10 JO IO 0000000000000 000000000000 OMOoooc oc 70 co 0000000000 0 MO MOHO OPIO 0 1090119010109 fe MOMO 0000009000000 000000000000 Gogo gogogo go 000000000000 fc 0000009000000 hI Figure 4 5 3 Aggregation Group Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Locality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for stackable switches e Global The group members may reside on different units in the stack The device supports two 8 port global aggregations e Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members e Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port e Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group 88 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 5 2 LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of th
31. gt Click to continue the wizard a STEP 2 According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected Set up Typical Network Application Rules According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selection Cancel Wizard Figure 4 8 9 Set up Typical Netowrk Application Rules page 2 screenshot The page includes the folling fileds Object Description e QCLID Select the QCL ID to which these QCEs apply e Traffic Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE 126 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 8 4 3 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets The screen in Figure 4 8 10 appears Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets Tos ToS Precedence 0 Class 0 Class A ToS Precedence 1 Class 1 Class os pesados ee Precede ToS Precedence
32. or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features is Up to 4k VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices Priority tagging 1 The Managed Switch allows 4k user manageable VLANs 2 One other VLAN VLAN ID 4093 is reserved for switch clustering MM EEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also prov
33. 1Q Tag Configures the VLAN identifier for the port The allowed values are 1 through 4095 The default value is 1 The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID 101 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 6 5 VLAN Membership Configuration a Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 64 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 3 appears VLAN Membership Configuration AAA re 7 pee vran mo a f2 Je Ja Ts Te 7 Te atole aaa 1 W M M A A A A A AE AE A A A E AE AE E Figure 4 6 3 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the
34. 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 187 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 14 2 LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears LLDP Configuration LLDP Parameters seconds 3 times seconds seconds PA eat es Port Mode Port Descr Sys Name Sys Deser Svs Capa Mgmt Addr 2 E 4 5 E T O z bI i PI BI RS RS RAN RS UO MA MEA O Bee MEA CM ES 10 Ma E E El El E El El El El E El E El El E El E El El El El E El A A E El El E El E El El E El E El E E El E El El El El E El El El E E El El E E E E E El E El El E El El El El E El K E E El E ES El e El El E El E El E E El Es El El El El E El
35. 2 Class 2 Class ToS Precedence 3 Class Precedence 3 Class aes ToS Precedence 4 Class 4 Class Jos Precedence 4 ass Frecede ToS Precedence 5 Class 5 Class ToS Precedence 6 Class Precedence 6 Class Tos Precedence Clos ToS Precedence 7 Class T Class Cancel Wizard Figure 4 8 10 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping page screenshot The page includes the folling fileds Object Description e QCL ID Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies e ToS Precedence Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use QoS Control List Configuration QCL 1 iv OCE Type Type Value Traffic Class ll 127 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 8 4 4 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets The screen in Figure 4 8 11 appears Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets Tag Priority 1 Class Low w Tag Priority 3 Class Cancel Wizard Figure 4 8 11 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping page screenshot The page includes the folling fileds Object Description e QCL ID Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies e VLAN Priority Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal M
36. 24 SWITCH gt qos rate limiter 17 24 enable 1000 QoS Shaper Description Set or show the port shaper Syntax QoS Shaper lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable shaper disable Disable shaper default Show shaper mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps shaper for port 9 16 262 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R swrTcH gos shaper 9 16 enable 1000 QoS Unicast Description Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable unicast storm control disable Disable unicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable unicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm unicast enable 1k QoS Multicast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable multicast storm control disable Disable multicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps 263 Example Enable multicast storm
37. 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources R RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device In 1998 the
38. 270 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 300 Example Set age time in 100 seconds swensonn agetime 100 Dot1x Holdtime Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Dot1x Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire default Show hold time Default Setting 10 Example Set hold time in 100 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x holdtime 100 271 6 9 Access Control List Command ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 300 Example Set age time in 100 seconds User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt dot1x agetime 100 ACL Action Description Set or show the ACL port default action Syntax ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of
39. 4 8 5 appears Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard Please select an action Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different GCL policies Set up Typical Network Application Rules set up the specific OCL for different typical network application quality control Set up ToS Precedence Mapping set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of Tos 3 bits when receiving IPvdIPyb packets Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when recening VLAN tagged packets To continue click Next Figure 4 8 5 Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies e Setup Typical Network Setup the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control Application Rules e Setup ToS Precedence Setup the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when Mapping receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets e Set up VLAN Tag Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits when receiving Priority Mapping VLAN tagged packets 4 8 4 1 Set up Policy Rules Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 8 6 appear
40. AoT ot CONTO GOMER LO c a a a dos nao o A ae o 131 ALMUNIA SE a eso 132 AO AN GMP SNOODINO rere ne E cep cats es ace eae eases ws ee cee 132 49 2 IGMP Snooping Congar ALON si ste clined e A A A A 136 4 9 3 IGMP Port Related Configuration cccccccccsecceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeaeeeeseeeeesaeeesseeeeeas 137 94 IGMP SSM OPING Status a A AAA A A AAA AS 138 Ac en A a tiem aa uaar nde 139 4 10 IEEE 802 1X Network Access Control ccccoonnnncccconocaccncconnonccnononnnncononannnrrrnenannnrrrnnnnnnnrrrnnnnnrrrrnnannrennnnas 140 4 10 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based AuthenticatiON ooooccconnnconcnconcnccnonononcncnncnnonannnnnnnnoncnnoncnnonaninnnnnss 141 4 10 2 SOZ AX OY Stent COMMOULAU OM tus schvatesss decades laica 144 4 10 3 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Port ConfiguratiON ooccccooncncoconnncconnnnonocnnnnnnncnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonaronononnnnos 146 4104302 TXA POM Statis oer ss o elt o Be all id eae 149 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 10 5 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Statistics oooooonnnccccconncccnncononccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnncnnonnnncnnnnnnnancnncnonanennnnss 150 4 10 6 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration ooocccccocccncccccnnononcnnonononononcnnononononnncnnonnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrncnnnnnns 154 AIOT 802 1 Client CON UN o oa e ore 156 EENACCEESS COMO IIS iii ciencia A 159 A111 ACCess Control List COMMOUPr
41. Cancel Wizard Figure 4 11 8 Set up Source MAC and Secure IP Binding page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Binding Enabled Enable or disable the source IP and source MAC binding status for the given logical port Source MAC Address The source MAC address for the source IP and source MAC binding e Source IP Address The source IP address for the source IP and source MAC binding The ACL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use 174 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy gging Shutdown Counter Switch 1 Port SMAC SIP Binding y 7 y a 1 192 168 0 200 Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled OOO Switch 1 Port SMAC SIP Binding 00 30 pate oe se Dee eee EXT 3 rere Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 0 O Auto refresh Figure 4 11 9 4 11 3 5 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control The screen in Figure 4 11 10 appears Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules Set up the specific ACL to detect DoS attack by selecting the attack type for your rule O UDP DoS Fraggle A malicious attacker sending a large number of UDP packets with random ports to the target system IC
42. Default Setting Disable Example Enable IEEE802 1x founction for port1 swircHdottx mode enable Dot1x Status Description Set or show the 802 1X port state Syntax Dot1x State lt port_list gt macbased auto authorized unauthorized Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports macbased Switch performs 802 1X authentication on behalf of the client auto Port access requires 802 1X authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed default Show 802 1X state Default Setting Authorized Example Change IEEE802 1x mode in auto SWITCH gt dot1x state 1 auto Dot1x Server Description Set or show the RADIUS server IP address 266 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Syntax Dot1x Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters ip_addr RADIUS server IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set RADIUS server IP address for switch RADIUS server IP address is 192 168 0 254 SwTCHI gt dottx server 192 168 0 254 Dot1x Secret Description Set or show the secret shared with the RADIUS server Syntax Dot1x Secret lt shared_secret gt Parameters lt shared_secret gt Secret shared with external RADIUS server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed
43. Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 298 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes E EthemetType Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame F SN FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading lt also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information
44. E 215 o ease napa O A 215 SA A O 216 System Firmware Lodi E A ese ee 216 A ar a E teense e neater sate 218 O A meeen seeeee 218 PSS WM eect E tae sacs Santana A AE E E AT 219 Pista hee EA E Senda pe Sa cess eee aS 219 6 2 Port Management ComMadd ios 221 PORE CONNGUIALION AAA A ee 221 A Mia Magee haat a lou annadvadebe te 221 FOE Ol ANO LO 0 In saat a rretaaeacch baie alee e aateeetnaron esas 222 FOE Te NOW CONTO maa a a scene et et 222 Porn Maximum ae to A E EDS 223 POMPOWE ren e a ida e nada nated een ernest 224 Fe OFC SS SI Sir toe tec le diana 224 POPU SUA SCS eget A state a Mae A ae Ne ole Saree el cach ns hah O 225 PORES ORI MIN A asco os a at eh at ee ean 225 FOF INUIT IS lod eee 226 Mirror COMNGURAUION asian doi ita 227 A A 227 MITO SD uri idad 227 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R NITO MOGE oa dd 228 6 3 Link Aggregation Command iscicnciocnniari ii aid 229 Aggregation Configuration A A A id 229 Aggredatlon Adrasan aia 229 Aggregation Delle A E E E 230 Aggregation LOOKUD lt a cares 230 O OC Cs tscans Saar ee encase arnadacn i oocasn E E senda toronmaes wa oeoeeeiece anne ieaut 231 WAC PCO TI GUN AU ON ot A A ede 232 LAGP MOUE ti a atte ec eso Dees tees A A a eau AAA ae ea AA AS 233 PGP V 233 LACR ROG een ee en eee RS O OO O e eee ee 234 LAPSOS 234 LAR Salle aaa 235 6 4 VEAN Configuration Command i da 237 VLAN COn Igura lO td dadas e dd E e io 237 e o A 237 e E ec ee
45. Es E A l CESE A MON N NL WI Figure 2 2 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R front panel M Gigabit TP interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters M Gigabit SFP slots 1000Base SX LX mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber Mi Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS 232 male seria port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached RS 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users an run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the statup screen of the device 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Mi Reset button At the left of front panel the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power The following is the summary table of Reset button functions Reset Button Pressed and Released Function About 1 3 second Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load th
46. Half Duplex mode e 100 full Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode e 1000 full Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode e Disable Shutdown the port manually When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used e Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed e Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes Configure port transmit collision behavior e Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default e estart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port e Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled e ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled e Dynamic Link up power savings enabled 78 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R e Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled e Total Power Usage Total
47. IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP S Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS 304 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames
48. It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network management architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is show
49. Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group STX1 Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established STX2 Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established 10 100 1000Base T interfaces LED Color Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LNK ACT Off IfL10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down 22 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps 10 100 Orange ink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port LNK ACT Off If 1000 LNK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps If 1000 LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down MM 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down HM 7 Segment LED Display Stack ID 1 9 A F 0 To indicate the Switch ID of each SGSW Managed Switch Sw
50. MAC address table automatic source address learning and ageing 1392Kbytes embedded memory for packet buffers Support VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 4041 VLANs groups out of 4041 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Support Link Aggregation 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel Static Trunk Maximum 8 trunk groups up to 8 ports per trunk group Up to 16Gbps bandwidth Duplex Mode Provide Port Mirror many to 1 Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port 15 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R gt Quality of Service O 4 priority queues on all switch ports O Supports for strict priority and weighted round robin WRR CoS policies O Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control O Traffic policing policies on the switch port gt Multicast O Supports IGMP Snooping v1 v2 and v3 O Querier mode support gt Security O IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication O IP Based Access Control List ACL O MAC Based Access Control List O Port Security gt Management O WEB based Telnet Console Command Line management O Accesses through SNMPv1 v2c and v3 security set and get
51. Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Description Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE e Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care e Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE e Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care e Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value Description Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE e Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care e Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field fo
52. Refreshe Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed 184 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 13 Port Secu rity To be Continued Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the Managed Switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table The selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not a
53. SWITCHI gt vian delete 10 17 24 VLAN Lookup Description Lookup VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN status SWITCH gt vlan lookup 242 PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list Default Setting Promiscous Example Enable isolate for port10 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt pvlan isolate 10 enable 243 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 5 Spanning Tree Protocol Command RSTP Configuration Description Show RSTP configuration Syntax RSTP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Default Setting Disable Example Show RSTP status of port1 SWITCH gt rstp configuration 1 System Priority 32768 Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Protocol Version Normal Path Cost Priority Edge Point2
54. Switch 36 3 2 Management Access Overview User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E An administration console E Web browser interface a An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Console 5 Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised ha
55. The WGSW SGSW Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch please use the procedures as follow a Show the current IP address 1 On Switch gt prompt enter show ip 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway As show in Figure 5 2 COM1_115200 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help RedBoot gt fis load managed IRedBoot gt go Welcome to PLANET WGSW 24040 Command Line Interface Port Numbers 21 41 61 81 10 12 1416 1820 22 24 11131 oi 2 1 9111i13 191 112119211231 121i A ts ds tds E ts tes estada its E siestas pleitos siete IHIH Password Type help or to get help SWITCH gt show ip Disabled 192 168 0 108 299 299 299 0 192 168 0 1 115200 5 N 1 Figure 5 2 Show IP information screen ES Configure IP address 3 On Switch gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt As show in Figure 5 3 209 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Switch gt ip setup 192 168 1 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch IP 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 COM1_115200 HyperTerminal File Edit View Call Transfer Help RAM
56. WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration Example To restore default value but not reset IP address Switch gt system restore default keep_ ip System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name or clear to clear System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign Default Setting SGSW 24040 Example To set device title Switch gt System name SGSW 24040 LAB System Prompt Description Set the CLI prompt string Syntax System Prompt lt prompt gt 214 Parameters lt prompt gt CLI prompt string Default Setting SWITCH Example To change CLI title Switch gt system prompt SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040 gt User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R System Password Description Set or show the system password Syntax System Password lt password gt Parameters lt password gt System password or clear to clear Default Setting admin Example To set password Switch gt system password admin System SNTP Description Set or show the SNTP Time serv
57. address xx xx xx xx xx xx default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Show all of MAC table SWITCH gt mac dump MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statistics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Set all of MAC statistics SWITCH gt mac statistics 280 MAC Flash Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush 281 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 11 LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt lldp mode 1 enable 282 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R LLDP Optional TLV Description Show
58. and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public WGSW SGSW Managed Switch Stee eee mae SNMP Agent Status Enabled MRTG Index Page wrt ili il PC Workstation Bai ae E with SE ERE SNMP application H Internet IP Address LRG IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 4 SNMP management 3 6 Protocols The Managed Switch supports the following protocols a Virtual terminal protocols such as Telnet El Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 3 6 1 Virtual Terminal Protocols A virtual terminal protocol is a software program such as Telnet that allows you to establish a management session from a Macintosh a PC or a UNIX workstation Because Telnet runs over TCP IP you must have at least one IP address configured on the Managed Switch before you can establish access to it with a virtual terminal protocol Terminal emulation differs from a virtual terminal protocol in that you must connect a terminal directly to the console serial port To access the Managed Switch through a Telnet session 1 Be Sure of the Managed Switch is configured with an IP address and the Managed Switch is reachable from a PC 40 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 Start the Telnet program on a PC and connect to the Managed Switch The management interface is
59. both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persistent storage over a computer network Optional TLVs A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as 302 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame PING ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet resp
60. by Command Line interface Section 7 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch Section 8 TROUBSHOOTING The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch 14 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 1 4 Product Features gt Physical Port WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R E O Ol 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 4 mini GBIC SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 4 mini GBIC SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup 2 High performance 5GbE Stacking interface gt Layer 2 Features Ol Ol Ol 0 Ol O SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Complies with the IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 3u IEEE 802 3ab IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet standard Supports Auto negotiation and half duplex full duplex modes for all 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T ports Auto MDI MDI X detection for each RJ 45 port Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex High performance of Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth 8K
61. by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress e Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged e Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode e Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default e MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network e Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel access port e 802 1Q Tag 8100 e vMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802
62. by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports 301 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MD5 MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptographic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MDS is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Mirroring N For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port NetBIOS NFS O NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network
63. characters from 33 to 126 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R characters from 33 to 126 4 3 5 4 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The entry index key are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears SNMPvs Users Configuration Delete User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Priwacy Mame Level Protocol Password Protocol Password a000 e501 000007 default_user Mouth MoFriv Mone Mone Mone Mone Figure 4 3 7 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID A octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are e NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy e
64. flag is cleared by receipt of any BPDUs on the port Transitioning to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports than for other ports This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always Non Edge e Point2Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Table 4 7 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex 100 2 000 000 Full Duplex 95 1 999 999 Trunk 90 Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 4 1 000 000 Full Duplex Trunk Table 4 7 2 Recommended STP Path Costs 114 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R i ink Type Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Du
65. frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable Default Setting Action Permit 272 Rate Limiter Disable Port Copy Disable Loading Disable Shut down Disable Example 222 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SwITCHI gt ao action 17 24 deny 1 24 log shut ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 Default Setting 1 Example Set policy ID 8 for port 17 24 SWITCH gt acl policy 17 24 8 ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt packet_rate gt Parameters 273 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 15 default All rate limiters lt packet_rate gt Default Setting 1 Example 22 Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k SwITCHI gt ao rate 15 1024k ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used
66. illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port 92 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 6 VLAN 4 6 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers
67. into one of these two groups a Promiscuous ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN E Isolated ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header This feature works across the stack Port Isolation Configuration Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous Promiscuous g 10 Promiscuous v Figure 4 6 4 Private VLAN Configuration page screenshot 103 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch interface e PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Isolated A single
68. list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto 233 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Default Setting Auto Example Set key1 for port1 4 swircHsiecp key 1 4 1 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting Active Example Set passive for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt 234 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP status of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp status 1 4 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Key Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Sta
69. lt dport gt Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R lt smac gt Source MAC address Xx XX XX XX XX XX or any lt dmac gt Destination MAC address xx xx xx Xx XX Xx or any arp ARP keyword lt sip gt Source IP address a b c d n or any lt dip gt Destination IP address a b c d n or any lt arp_opcode gt ARP operation code anylarp rarplother lt arp_flags gt ARP flags request Smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any ip IP keyword lt protocol gt IP protocol number 0 255 or any lt ip_flags gt IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any icmp ICMP keyword lt icmp_type gt ICMP type number 0 255 or any lt icmp_code gt ICMP code number 0 255 or any udp UDP keyword lt sport gt Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any lt dport gt Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any tcp TCP keyword lt tcp_flags gt TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 1024 275 ACL Lookup Description
70. one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description 146 e Port e Admin State e Port State e Max Clients User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The port number for which the configuration below applies Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options only used when 802 1X or MAC based authentication is globally enabled Auto Requires an 802 1X aware client supplicant to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not 802 1X aware will be denied access Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients 802 1X aware or not The switch transmits an EAPOL Success frame when the port links up Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients 802 1X aware or not The switch transmits an EAPOL Failure frame when the port links up MAC Based Enables MAC based authentication on the port The switch doesn t transmit or accept EAPOL frames on the port Flooded frames and broadcast traffic will be transmitted on the port whether or not clients are authenticated on the port whereas unicast traffic against an unsuccessfully authenticated client will be dropped Clients that are not yet successfully authenticated will not be allowed to transmit frames of any kind The current state of the port lt can undertake one of the following values 802 1X Disabled 802 1X and MAC based authe
71. power usage in board measured in percent When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The Auto MDIX function will disable 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 4 2 appears Port Statistics Overview O 0 0 0 0 T 0 0 T SOS CO eS OO CO SS U 5 GOAO SO eS OS Oo eS Oo O SO 1 OC A CO A Oe ee OO ee ee CO ee OC ee O d CO d SOS OS CORSO RCS OD CORSO Re COS Oo SO Sl es O M0 OO 5 CO GG G0 0 OO ee See CO ee CO ee CO ee CO O SOS OS CORSO RS CS OR COR OR O Ml O SO a O Ml O M0 O 5 CO GO ee OO eS CO ee CO Bl CO 0 CO Bl CO O SOS OS ORS ORS CS OD COR OR COS O SO SOS OS COB OB CEO SSO eS Oo eS OC eS oO SO A SO SO eS Om ORCS OR COR OR ORS Oo SO O oO 1 2 3 4 5 E E O E 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 14 16 13 20 21 2A 23 2d Auto refresh Figure 4 4 2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot 79 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The displayed counters are Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port e Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port e Errors The number of frames received in error
72. reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Figure 4 2 15 Factory Default Reset screen After the Factory button be pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as following Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the VDSL2 Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx PLANET scort Web Networking amp Communication VC 810S Hardware Reset button 99 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 2 10 System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user have to re login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the screen in Figure 4 2 16 appears System Reboot Are you sure you want to perform a System Reboot Figure 4 2 16 System Reboot page screenshot You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not If the SYS LED is blinking then it is in the firmware load stage if the SYS LED light on you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch 60 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R E Examp
73. stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting 104 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 7 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions E STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D E RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are
74. switch e Forring topology a backup path is also provided 203 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Master Forwarding Table Local Local Primary Pd Y pia bfi i ch D bfa i E i Ii 0 Hom pp Primary Primary Ro Po hi Ri bfa i C4 bfa i a bfa Es i cu Auto refresh L Figure 4 16 9 Stack Information page screenshot Master Forwarding Table 4 16 4 Stack Port State Ovewview This page provides an overview of the current switch port states Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows Port State Overview Figure 4 16 10 Port State Overview page screenshot 204 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 16 5 Stack Example Stacking function is convenient for administrator to manage multiple switches by single IP Basically you got to have min 2 units The SGSW Switch supports auto stack configuration Once the stack cable is connect to the stack port of each SGSW switch and power on them the stack is builded automatically and the Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch It is also easy to add or delete stackable switch to the stack without service interruption The key point of the Stack management are m Identify the MASTER SWITCH a Assign re assing Switch ID for each management purpose Step 1 linking the switches by CB STX50 stack cabl
75. switch the new switch will inherit the former s configuration see Replacing a Switch above 5 Deleting a switch will remove any configuration pertaining to it 6 Deleting an active switch will leave it with an unassigned Switch ID until rebooted or manually assigning a Switch ID 4 16 1 2 Master Election Within a managed stack one master switch or just master must be elected Any switch not being master is a slave switch or just slave To elect a master the following criteria are evaluated sequentially 1 If any switch already claims to have been master for more than 30 seconds then that switch will become master 2 If multiple switches claim to have been master for more than 30 seconds then the switch which has been master for the longest period of time will become master The switch with the smallest master priority 4 The switch with the smallest MAC address The above algorithm ensures that once a master has been elected and has been master for more than 30 seconds it will remain master However in some cases the user may want to enforce a new master election 4 16 1 3 Stack Redundancy In the unlikely event that a SGSW Switch fails in a stack stack integrity is maintained if the redundant cable is connected to the stack The affected switch within the sack can be replaced or removed without disrupting normal operation The broken link is bypassed and data transmission continues uninterrupted The single mana
76. system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels e Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network ac
77. the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file 1 Click System File Management Copy Operation 2 Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server 3 Set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the Managed Switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and click Apply 4 Ifyou replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu tftp to file ISA is 192 168 0 52 Source File Name FW SGSx_v1 2 1 O FW SGSx_runtime_v1 1 1 0 bix Destination File Name a FW SGSx_v1 2 1 192 168 0 100 5000 Fw 5SG5 _vT Ob 54 52 4 FW SGSx_v1 2 1 1 bix to 192 16 File size 3083024 135168 Bytes sent 5138 Bytes sec Figure 4 2 20 TFTP Server system software transmit screenshot 62 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R e f you download to a new destination file go to the System File Set Start Up menu mark the operation code file used at startup and click Apply e To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu e To delete a file select System File Management File Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box a
78. the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal Pull out the module gently through the handle 29 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Figure 2 14 Pull out the SFP transceiver Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull out the module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed Switch 30 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 2 4 Connecting DC Power Supply WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040R The WGSW 24040R and SGSW 24040R support 48VDC power input connect the power cable to the switch at the input terminal block 1 The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3 5 2 The terminals are marked 48V FG 3 Loosen the two screws so you can slide the DC cable beneath it Insert the DC cable into the connector first and screw it down tight 4 Connect the power cable to the DC power supply After power up or reset the Managed Switch performs a cold start procedure TED 24040 A 5060H 2 Figure 2 15 48VDC connector ad Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of Managed Switch ensure that the arning power switch in the OFF position and the DC power is OFF 31 User s Manual of WGSW 24
79. the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds m 4 14 2 2 LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object e Port e Mode Description The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Select LLDP mode e Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed e Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information e Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors e Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors 189 Port Descr Sys Name Sys Descr Sys Capa Mgmt Addr User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system descripti
80. then by MAC address The Static MAC Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 2 appears Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members rt omer Delete WLAN 10 mac aadress a 2 3 3 5 6 7 o 9 x0 34 12 9 4 15 s6 17 10 9 o0 21 2a 2a z4 Figure 4 12 2 Static MAC Table Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the entry e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry e Adding a New Static Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC Entry address and port members for the new entry Click Save 182 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 12 3 MAC Address Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address MAC Address Table for Switch 1 Start from VLAN 1 land MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Autoretesh E A ee ven Tv cis col BET eessen Dynamic 00 02 B3 EC 9D CF Dynamic 00 08 B6 00 06 90 7 Static 00 30 4F 24 24 C1 y Dynamic 08 00 46 6A 1F 90 7 Static FEFEFE O AEAII AV AVA AVA N A Figure 4 12 3 MAC Address Table Statu
81. then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are always forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets e IPv6 Flow Label Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 16 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed 86 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 5 1 Static Aggregation Configuration This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors Aggregation Mode Configuration Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TC
82. to be transferred to another switch then the configuration may be deleted by choosing Delete followed by Save m Replacing a Switch If a switch is to be replaced with another switch for example replacing failing hardware the following procedure must be used to assign the configuration of the failing switch to the new hardware 1 Remove the failing switch from the stack For example assume that the failing switch had Switch ID 3 2 Insert the new switch into the stack The new switch is assigned an unused Switch ID Sy To remove the automatic switch ID assignment choose Delete followed by Save The new switch is then shown with Switch ID set to 4 To assign the configuration of Switch ID 3 to the new hardware simply choose 3 in the Switch ID column and click 198 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Save 5 The new hardware has now taken over the configuration of the failing hardware General Switch ID Assignment Rules When assigning Switch IDs to the devices in the stack you must note the following 1 Switches with assigned IDs can be changed to use any other switch ID possibly by swapping Switch ID with another active switch 2 When swapping two Switch IDs the devices will retain their own configuration except for the Switch ID 3 Switches without an assigned Switch ID can only be assigned to any unused ID 4 When assigning a Switch ID of an inactive switch to a new
83. v1 0b080827 v1 0b080827 v1 0b080827 Auto refresh C Refresh 49 4 2 2 IP Configuration User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 2 2 appears IP Configuration DHCP Client IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 132 168 0 1 VLAN ID 1 Figure 4 2 2 IP Configuration page screenshot The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Buttons Object DHCP Client IP Address IP Mask IP Router SNTP Server VLAN ID Timezone Offset Description Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 Provide t
84. which this ACE applies e Any The ACE applies to any port e Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch e Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE e Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation e Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped e Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled e Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are e Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log e Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged e Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are e Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled e Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited The ACL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown CN IPVdAICMIP DoS Ping of Death Deny Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 0 O L Auto refresh Figure 4 11 12 177 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 4 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the s
85. will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next QCE ID is not specified the QCE will be placed last in the list Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_ next gt etype lt etype gt vid lt vid gt port lt udp_tcp_port gt dscp lt dscp gt tos lt tos_list gt tag_prio lt tag_prio_list gt lt class gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCLID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 lt qce_id_next gt Next QCE ID 1 24 etype Ethernet Type keyword 259 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R lt etype gt Ethernet Type vid VLAN ID keyword lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 port UDP TCP port keyword lt udp_tcp_port gt Source or destination UDP TCP port 0 65535 dscp IP DSCP keyword lt dscp gt IP DSCP 0 63 tos IP ToS keyword lt tos_list gt IP ToS list 0 7 tag_prio VLAN tag priority keyword lt tag_prio_list gt VLAN tag priority list 0 7 lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QCE Syntax QoS QCL Lookup lt qcl_id gt lt qc
86. 00 Master Switch 00 30 4i 24 24 c1 Last Master Change Figure 4 16 7 Stack Information page screenshot Stack Topology The page includes the following fields Object Description e Stack Topology Specifies the type of topology for the stack e Chain A chain of switches that is no redundant forwarding paths e Ring Aring of switches thereby providing redundant forwarding paths e Back to Back Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports e Stack Member Count The number of switches in the stack e Last Topology Change The time of the last topology change in the stack e Master Switch The MAC address of the current stack master switch e Last Master Change The time of the last master change in the stack ES Stack List For each switch in the stack the following information is shown The MAC address Switch ID product name and version and master election state The master election state is normally No Only when a forced master election is enforced by the user the master election state takes the value Yes For details about the master election algorithm see Stack Configuration The Stack List screen in Figure 4 16 8 appears 202 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Stack List Lac 1ember Witcn i i PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed v1 0b080827 2d 03 05 02 No Switch v1 0b080627 Ho PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch PLANET SGSW 24040 Manag
87. 040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 3 Stack Installation SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The SGSW 24040 series Managed Switch provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP address And up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed You can add SGSW 24040 series switches as needed to support more network clients knowing that your switching fabric will scale to meet increasing traffic demands Two types of stack topologies are supported by the SGSW 24040 series a Chain topology Same as a disconnected ring a Ring topology Please find the following picture for sample connection Figure 2 17 Ring Stack topology 32 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 3 1 Connecting Stacking cable Before attempting to connect stacking ports verify that you have the required stack cables The following cables are used to connect stacked switches e CB STX50 50cm Short stack cable used to connect adjacent SGSW switches e CB STX200 200cm Long Redundant stack cable used to connect the top and bottom SGSW switches of a stack There are two high performance HDMI like Stack ports on the rear panel for proprietary management stack Only attached PLANET CB STX50 and CB STX200 cross overed HDMI cable can be used STEP 1 Plug one end of the cable in the STX1 Cascade Down port and th
88. 0R Using Stacking it is possible to connect a number of switches together in a stack which behaves as a single switch as seen from outside the stack Two types of stack topologies are supported a Ring topology E Chain topology same as a disconnected ring Multiple PLANET SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R devices may be connected together to constitute a ring or chain stack topology using the STX 5Gbps ports as interconnect links Dedicated stacking features built into SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R makes all devices in the stack operate together as a single much larger switch Among the stacking features are Hardware controlled stack wide learning and continuous automatic MAC table synchronization Shortest path forwarding providing low latency and optimal use of stacking link bandwidth QoS consistency across stack Single point of management for simple stack administration Low Cost and Flexible HDMI like Stacking cables Real Plug and Play connectivity The following figure shows an example with five devices in a ring topology stack Each device in the stack is in a stack context called a unit The ports connecting the units are called stack ports and the ports connecting to external hosts and switches are called front ports 196 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R El Chain Stack A chain of switches that is no redundant forwarding paths Figure 4 16 1 Chain Stack topology a Ring Stack A ri
89. 3 Views Configuration Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index key are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 8 appears SNMPv3 Views Configuration View Type OID Subtree Figure 4 3 8 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete e Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 73 e View Type e OID Subtree User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are e included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included e excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk E EXAMPLE Add a new SNMPv3 user In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration an
90. 4 01 3 he Yes 3 w PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O Start Master Election Figure 4 16 12 Stack Configuration Step 5 We wish to make the SGSW switch with MAC 00 30 4f 24 04 76 Switch ID 2 to become the Stack Master and swap the Switch ID to 1 E Select the switch with ID 1 and assign a new ID for this unit for example ID 4 Stack Configuration A AA A ee elete Stack Member Switc Capable DO 30 4f 24 24 01 1 v Yes 3 v PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch J 00 30 4f 24 04 76 Yes 3 Y PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O 00 30 4 24 04 01 Yes PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch Figure 4 16 13 Assing new ID for current master Select the target switch and set up with lower priority 1 also re assing the Switch ID 1 for it After click Save click Start Master Election and save again Stack a Switch Type 00 30 4f 24 24 c1 7 Y E a PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O 00 30 4 24 04 76 1 w Yes PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O 00 30 4f 24 04 01 3 Y Yes lee PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O Start Master 4 Figure 4 16 14 Assing lower priority value fo the target switch 206 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R a Reflash the web browser the switch with MAC address 00 30 4f 24 04 76 become the stack master now Stack Configuration 00 30 4f 24 04 76 1 v 1 PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch 00 30 4f 24 04 01 3 Yes 3 PLANET SGSW 24040 Ma
91. 4040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R each second while Passive will wait fora LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to 4 5 3 LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 5 5 appears LACP System Status Agar ID Partner Partner Last Local System ID Key Changed Ports Mo ports enabled or no existing partners Auto refresh L Figure 4 5 5 LACP System Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance 99 For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id e Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner e Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID e Last changed The time since this aggregation changed e Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port 4 5 4 LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 5 6 appears 90 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R LACP Port Status Partner Partner Po 1 E J 4 5 E E o Auto refresh L Figure 4 5 6 LACP Port S
92. 7 9 appears RSTP Port Configuration Aggregated Ports Configuration RSTP Enabled Path Cost Priority CIT Physical Ports Configuration Port RSTP Enabled Path Cost Priority Edge Point2point ma Fa Oo Oo 38 is sl J i _ Auto ka Auto w a 2 F 2 0 e oO a 5s oO MA ET 5 OO tee 7 oO sew eo mas 2 oO ia o a e AA i 1 rae mal an al E a ml Figure 4 7 9 RSTP Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e RSTP Enabled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port e Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower 113 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 e Edge Controls whether the port is known to connect directly to edge devices no Bridges attached The Edge
93. 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged E IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by
94. 92 168 0 100 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears The server 192 166 0 100 at Web Management requires a Username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication Without a secure connection User name f admin e Remember my password Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 43 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R a Y PLANET 2 a i J 7 jie ees eas 9 11 1 15 7 19 2 2 21 22 23 24 gt System gt SNMP t Port Management Link Aggregation gt VLAN Spanning Tree Welcome to PLAN ET t Multicast r Qos WGSW 24040 802 1X Authentication t Access Control List y LLDP gt Diagnostics Management Switch Security WGSW 24040 PLANET Technology Corporation 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email sales planet com tw Copyright 2008 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 3 Default main page Now you can use the Web management interfac
95. Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy e Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocol are e None None authentication protocol e MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication 12 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R protocol e SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication Password protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are e None None privacy protocol e DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 4 3 5 5 SNMPv
96. BxBB0BBBBO 0x lt B40000008 10x0002c340 BxB3fe10061 available FLASH Bx8BB0B0006 Bx808B0000 256 blocks of 4xB00018000 bytes each Executing boot script in 3 000 seconds enter C to abort RedBoot gt memtest Testing 0x0002c340 0x03fe1000 Completed no errors RedBoot gt fis load managed RedBoot gt go Welcome to PLANET WGSW 24046 Command Line Interface Port Numbers 4 11131 01 Fi 1101121141161 91111131151 H 118120122124 1171191211231 HHH HH Password Type help or to get help SWITCH gt ip setup 192 168 1 108 255 255 255 080 192 168 1 1 SWITCH gt Connected 00 06 52 ANS Ty 115200 6 N 1 Figure 5 3 Set IP address screen 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of WGSW SGSW Managed Switch through the new IP address If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in console to get the help description You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interfa
97. C address xx xX XX XX XX XX Example Assign SID2 for switch that use MAC address 00 30 4f 24 04 76 SWITCH gt stack sid assign 2 00 30 4f 24 04 76 289 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 7 SWITCH OPERATION 7 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 7 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 7 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information fr
98. C d 14 O d 15 C C 16 d d 17 E d Figure 4 9 6 IGMP Port Related Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port e Fast Leave Enable the Fast Leave on the port 137 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 9 4 IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The status relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping status screen in Figure 4 9 7 appears IGMP Snooping Status Statistics LAN Querier Querier Querier V1 Reports 2 Reports Y3 Reports Y2 Leave ID Status Transmit Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive 0 0 0 O 0 A IDLE IGMP Groups Port Members AAA em vian 10 erous felefele epesi No IGMP groups OOOO OO Mo MP grouns Auto refresh _ Figure 4 9 7 IGMP Snooping status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry e Groups The present IGMP groups Max are 128 groups for each VLAN e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry e Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE
99. DIUS statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Statistics screen in Figure 4 10 6 appears 802 1X Statistics Port 1 Receive EAPOL Counters Transmit EAPOL Counters Total Total Response ID Request ID Responses Requests Start Logoft Invalid Type Invalid Lengt Access Challenges Other Requests Auth Successes Auth Failures Last Supplicant Info Version Source Identity Auto refresh Figure 4 10 6 802 1X Statistics Port 1 page screenshot 150 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the table header a EAP OL Counters These counters are not available for MAC based ports Supplicant frame counter statistics There are seven receive frame counters and three transmit frame counters gt x lt gt lt gt lt my x lt y y x x AJ gt lt Tx MIN gt lt gt lt Response ID Responses Invalid Type Invalid Length Total Request ID EAPOL Counters CTC O OOOO oe OO dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx dot1ixAuthEapolRespldFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFramesRx dot1 xAuthInvalidEapolFramesRx dot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx dot1xAuthEapolFramesTx dotixAuthEapolReqldFramesTx dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx 151 The number of val
100. EEE 802 3 10Base T IEEE 802 3u 100Base TX 100BASE FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure standards Compliaiic IEEE 802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1d Spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid spanning tree protocol IEEE 802 1p Class of service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP 18 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Switch Front Panel The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the switch Figure 2 1 and 2 2 shows the front panel of the Managed Switches WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040RFront Panel di wae es ee D AS A ee 6 8 g8 20 JE 3 o p PWR AMA Ii A Hn TN 5 9 9 21 22 23 24 Figure 2 1 WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R front panel SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Front Panel da a Wa ss ETT IE 2
101. Es is 128 5 Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 1 appears Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter Auto refresh Figure 4 11 1 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are e Any The ACE will match any ingress port 159 e Frame Type e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Copy e Logging e Shutdown e Counter e Modification Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R e Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy e Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are e Any The ACE will match any frame type e EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames e ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames e IPv4 The ACE will match all IPv4 frames e IPv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol e IPv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol e IPv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol e IPv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE e Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and
102. ID is automatically assigned to the SGSW Switch The automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch STEP 7 Connect the RS 232 serial cable to the console port on the front of the stack master then loin the SGSW Switch to start the switch management Or you can use the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to displayt the IP address of the stack and Web login the stack with this IP address The default IP address of the SGSW Switch is 192 168 0 100 PLANET Smart Disc overy Lite File Option Help Be A aeea A E 1 fo 10 30 4F 24 24 01 SSW 24040 pu 0b080827 192168 0 TA ESP S 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 PLANET SGSW 24040 Select Adapter 192 168 3 52 00 02 B3 EC 9D CF Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All A Connect to Device Device SGSW 24040 00 30 4F 24 24 C1 Get Device Information done Figure 2 20 Use PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of stack master 34 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The stack switch with least priority ID or MAC Address number will become Master Only Master switch s management interface console telnet web and SNMP is accessible It s allow to build a stack of up to 16 PLANET SGSW Switches If there is the space li
103. ISION 1 0 AUGUEST 2008 Part No EM WGSW 24040_SGSW 24040 2080 A93070 000 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R TABLE OF CONETNTS INTRODUTI N sra il 12 Wel Packet Contents i oil 12 12 PFOGUCEDESCLIDUON wis cashinicsancants corskanesnustandsentaaa cones E eaa aE a buss uauensbonnuanduathancainnsusauasknucansstansoushuas 12 1 3 How to Use This Mandalas 14 TAProduct ROCAS ia 15 1 5 Product SpecificalON aiii acct aa a ecioel a ar a a 17 ZANSTALEA TION cuidateee aia dee 19 2A Hardware Descrip nara alar aa laa load idos 19 e ES O eee ee 19 A o o aa a sta ease sauces E cakes tetas E E A a 21 ZV SVVILC IVES COM Fe ANGI oraa atest oa etd ec meditate G nde ee 5 iS niaeeen Send oad tec bled ae Mecsas Ahn ete ate 23 ZZ Salte SWE Mnai a a a eed a a a a aE aa A 26 22 DESK NAS TAMA oM reirs E E E A E E EA EEE A EEE a a EE Ue natlers 26 ZZ ARACE MOUNT atte 27 2 2 0 MSstalling Ihe SEP WanSCeINel acan A a N 28 224 Gonnecting DO POWEr SUP et 31 2 3 S9tacK Installation da 32 2 9 CONME CHING SLACKING CADIC yorti coreano airline ooo 33 2 3 2 Management Stacking ooooccnccocccncconcnnononnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnrn nn nr nn R RR RR RR nr RR RR Rnnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnrrnnrnnrnnaninns 33 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT Tooocoocooccocco crono rr rr rr rr nr rra 36 et IREGUIFEINIGIIUS iaa iii a E 36 3 2 Management ACCESS OVER aa 37 3 3 AGMINISU ALON CONS aa 37 3 4 Web Manade Metas bn ncntus Ganeeuenacadcasnvconenmensencusiatnebusu
104. If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_ next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch keyword is used the rule applies to aSyntax ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt switch port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt sid gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip_flags gt udp lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp ACE ID 1 1024 default Next available ID lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt Switch ACE keyword switch port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt sid gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt Next ACE ID 1 1024 default Add ACE last Port ACE keyword Port number Policy ACE keyword Policy number 1 8 Switch ID 1 16 or any VLAN ID 1 4095 or any VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast Ethernet Type keyword Ethernet Type or any 274 lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt ip lt sip gt lt sip gt lt dip gt
105. LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters 284 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 SwITCHI gt Ip delay 1 LLDP Reinit Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 SWITCH gt lldp reinit 3 LLDP Information Description Show LLDP neighbor device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 285 LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics 286 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 12 Stack Management Command Stack List Description Show the list of switches in stack Syntax Stack List detailed productinfo Parameters detailed Show detailed information Stack List Description Set the master election priority Syntax Stack Master Priority lt sid gt local lt mst_elect_prio gt Parameters lt sid gt local Switch ID
106. MP DoS Ping of Death A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet larger than the 65 536 bytes to the target system Fl ICMP DoS Smurf A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet with broadcast destination addresses to the target system Cancel Wizard Figure 4 11 10 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e UDP DoS Fraggle A malicious attacker sending a large number of UDP packets with random ports to the target system When the target system receives these packets it will determine what application is waiting on the destination port When it realizes that there is no application that is waiting on the port it will generate an ICMP 175 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R packet of destination unreachable to the spoofed source address Eventually leading it to be unreachable by other clients and the system will go down e ICMP DoS Ping of A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet larger than the Death 65 536 bytes to the target system Some target systems cannot handle the packet larger than the maximum IP packet size which often causes target system froze crashed or rebooted e ICMP DoS Smurf A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet with broadcast destination addresses to the target system After receiving the packet all reachable hosts send an ICM
107. Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 866 2 2219 9516 Pes ie ee eee Email sales planet com tw Copyright c12008 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Help Button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports F L J El SFP Ports PF Stack Ports L wW ul 45 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears gt System SNMP t Port Management t Link Aggregation F VLAN l Spanning Tree gt Multicast QoS F 802 1X Authentication Access Control List t MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics Security Stack Figure 4 1 5 WGSW SGSW Managed Switch Main Funcrions Menu 46 4 2 System User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative
108. P echo reply packet back to the spoofed source address Thus the target host will suffer from a larger amount of traffic generated 4 11 3 6 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for the ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for these ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selections Ingress Port Any Rate Limiter ID Disabled we Logging Enabled Disabled Figure 4 11 11 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules page screenshot The page includes the following fields 176 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port to which this ACE applies e Any The ACE applies to any port e Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port e Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 e Switch Select the switch to
109. P request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 10 1 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 142 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Authentication server 302 1X Switch RADIUS 3 FAPOL Start FAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request FAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Port Authorized EAPOL Logoft Port Unauthorized Figure 4 10 2 EAP message exchange E Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client
110. PYUBP Port Number Figure 4 5 2 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot Object Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number Description The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 3 appears 87 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Aggregation Group Configuration Cre embers o daa Normal O 1 Ooo0o0o0o0do0o0oo oOoo00o00cno0o0oo Oooo0o0o 2 a if 5 z fi 5 3 J efe efe efe efe o efe o epe pre eH pee ee spe pre eH pee eH e pie eL pee ee fe efe
111. QoS Control List Configuration Ram OCE Type Type Value Traffic Class H Figure 4 8 1 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCL Select a QCL to display a table that lists all the QCEs for that particular QCL e QCE Type Specifies which frame field the QCE processes to determine the QoS class of the frame The following QCE types are supported e Ethernet Type The Ethernet Type field If frame is tagged this is the Ethernet Type that follows the tag header e VLAN ID VLAN ID Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged e TCP UDP Port Pv4 TCP UDP source destination port e DSCP IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP e ToS The 3 precedence bit in the ToS byte of the IPv4 IPv6 header also known as DS field e Tag Priority User Priority Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged or priority tagged 119 e Type Value e Traffic Class e Modification Buttons User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Indicates the value according to its QCE type e Ethernet Type The field shows the Ethernet Type value e VLAN ID The field shows the VLAN ID e TCP UDP Port The field shows the TCP UDP port range e DSCP The field shows the IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value The QoS class associated with the QCE You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons E Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE 0 Moves
112. SNMP Trap Configuration ccccccccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeesaeeeesaeeensaees 67 AS ONMPVS GORMGUMALION see A A A a hee ae 69 4 301 SNMPYS Accesses Configuration csiis iren Mecano deca Se sees oA ED 69 43 52 ONMPV3 Communities CONnmQuratiOn ir da 70 4 3 5 3 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration ccccccccssececceseecceeseecceueeecseseeecsseeeseeeecssececsugeeessueeesssageeessasessssaeess 71 4 354 SNMPV3 USEFS Configuration vai A AREENA Ra 72 4 30 95 SONMPVS VIEWS Configuratio iisesteveicc delves cater ones tvecedaesioeetacthloved teva Da L Ea hd EEN EE eter ecde 73 AA OFC Management did 77 AA VPOTGOnIOU alom aiue a 77 AAD POR SlalStiCS OVERVICW vastoslc stances e a ae eader paptdsds hestitant a ists ote des 79 243 Detailed POPE SAU SUC S sinaloa 80 AA RROMII GC OFFICAL ON Ne eB Lal aah Ae al roar aa hae al do ke 82 RNAI a ON OC AU ON esac erase aaa 85 4 5 1 Static Aggregation Configuration sterre sees et AD AA AD wae Mss ese aces 87 Flash Code Cont Sus ado 87 Static Aggregation Group Configuration oooocccccocnnconoccncnoncnnnnoncnnnnnncnnnnncnnonnnrnnonnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnonrnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnninnnas 87 Ao LAGP COMIgUia lO a odas 89 AS AGE System Sas A A OS 90 NA O 90 O NO A O E RAS 92 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R A60 VLAN A RS 93 46 1 LAN OVET E Wi AAA a aiii 93 46 2 EEE COZ 1QVEAN cst seca it a e a a ds a
113. STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states E Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state _ Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to n
114. SW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 2 Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Display port1 4 status SWITCH gt port configuration 1 4 Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Port State Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode Power Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled 221 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Excessive Link Discard Down Discard Down Discard Down Discard 100fdx User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Default Setting Enable Example Disable port SWITCH gt port state 1 disable Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt 10hdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdxfauto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps fu
115. Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_ TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys namelsys descr sys capalmgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the port sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys_capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 SWITCH gt lidp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt 283 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in 10 SWITCHI gt Idp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 SWITCH gt lldp hold 10 LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax
116. St Command ia 272 AGL COMNGUIAUION it a dei deb elena cold eo cgi att 272 PAC PRC A ceases 272 PRG NEP ONG a E cciana 273 ACERA A oni etc catered alas a not ios A AA AAA er dee A AE 273 A O nen ree 274 A te ON 275 E LOOK Oe AO PI A A E A edna aoe 276 AGLLOOKU Ds A A A A A da 276 6 10 MAC Address Table COM ied eueteinedd vavouseteomesr meena eed aes 277 MAC ConnguratiONsss tse ca2e sted sececce fates ales Aree a A ar aad shee eae aes ee eet anes eerste 277 ic o A o A era eat eh eugene ae 2 7 MAC O NA 278 MAG Look o a aio cs e a e e a a a o O 278 MAA A ooo ee 279 MIA A ee Pn etn ea 279 o aioe ecards oh o A see at atetes 280 MAC F165 salen OO ge eee eC O 280 MAS de Li E 281 6211 LEDP ComMMand oos E A ici 282 EEDFP COMIOUrat ON ii ia 282 A E E a a eo 282 EDP OU Olea coe sete a a E O A 283 EED S AE N E A E NE E E O E DE A T E E E A T O E 283 OT 284 A pci2geteeaet aciassecra A berger oaaeae A dams oauaes AE E 284 LEDE REINI acces A O anaes esse cage A 285 LEDP NOMA ta a a ca a A aoe eigen a ede nent 285 ELDR SEALS OS tias 286 6 12 Stack Management Command ui te eee re 287 A o e a 287 SACRES aee aan erat atema cua a a peared a suednomene peoteaatamaradidagetannas 287 Slack VASES ROC SC a ach LO aco 287 LACK A ON 288 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R MICK ORO WAD MEAR eR ne eo nr A e ee eee eee nen eee 288 Stack SID Delete 288 HACIA O a to e o a a ee Ok 289 o WITC TOPERA TON oscuras 290 T Addr
117. TA Rules The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 4 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 19 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 110 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 7 1 RSTP System Configuration This page allows you to configure RSTP system settings The settings are used by all RSTP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatiable Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops The RSTP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 7 7 appears RSTP System Configuration System Priority Forward Delay Figure 4 7 7 RSTP System Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority A valu
118. This has no effect for MAC based ports This setting applies to ports running MAC based authentication only Suppose a client is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch that runs MAC based authentication and suppose the client gets successfully authenticated Now assume that the client powers down his PC What should make the switch forget about the authenticated client Reauthentication will not solve this problem since this doesn t require the client to be present as discussed under Reauthentication Enabled above The solution is aging of authenticated clients The Age Period which can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds works like this A timer is started when the client gets authenticated After half the age period the switch starts looking for frames sent by the client If another half age period elapses and no frames are seen the client is considered removed from the system and it will have to authenticate again the next time a frame is seen from it If on the other hand the client transmits a frame before the second half of the age period expires the switch will consider the client alive and leave it authenticated and restart the age timer This setting applies to ports running MAC based authentication only If the RADIUS server denies a client access or a RADIUS server request times out after 40 seconds with two retries the client is put on hold in the Unauthorize
119. VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 225 Port Numbers Description Show port numbering Syntax Port Numbers 226 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port Default Setting Disable Mirror SID Description Set or show the mirror switch ID Syntax Mirror SID lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 227 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Default Setting 1 Example Set mirror SID 2 for switch SWITCH gt miror sid 2 Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode Default Setting Disable Example Enab
120. W 24040R 6 6 Multicast Configuration Command IGMP Configuration Description Show IGMP snooping configuration Syntax IGMP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting IGMP Mode Disabled Flooding Disabled Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode enable IGMP Mode Description Set or show the IGMP snooping mode Syntax IGMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting Disabled Example 251 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Enable IGMP mode SWITCHI gt igmp mode enable IGMP State Description Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN Syntax IGMP State lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting VID State 1 Enabled Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode enable IGMP State Description Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN Syntax IGMP State lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP snooping 252 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R di
121. able 254 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R IGMP Flooding Description Set or show the IGMP snooping unregistered flood operation Syntax IGMP Flooding enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP flooding disable Disable IGMP flooding default Show IGMP flood mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable IGMP flooding function SWITCH gt igmp flooding enable IGMP Groups Description Show IGMP groups Syntax IGMP Groups lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 IGMP Status Description Show IGMP status Syntax IGMP Status lt vid gt 255 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting Disable Example Enable IGMP flooding function SWITCH gt igmp status 1 Querier Rx TX Rx Rx Rx Rx VID Status Queries Queries V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leave 256 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 7 Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports QoS Classes Description Set or show the number of traffic classes Syntax QoS Classes lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Number of traffic classes 1 2 or 4 Default Set
122. able DHCP sever User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt ip dhcp disable 218 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 VLAN ID 1 Example Set IP address SWITCH gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 IP Ping Description Ping IP address ICMP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP host address a b c d lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example 219 SWITCH gt ip ping 192 168 0 51 PING server 192 168 0 51 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 0 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 1 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 2 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 3 time 0ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 4 time 0ms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad 220 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SG
123. al identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 e System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is O to 255 e System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 4 3 4 SNMP Trap Configuration Configure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 3 appears 67 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Destination Address 0000 o Trap Inform Timeout seconds Figure 4 3 3 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Trap Mode e Trap Version e Trap Community e Trap Destination Address e Trap Authentication Failure e Trap Inform Mode e Trap Inform Timeout seconds e Trap Inform Retry Times Description Indic
124. al of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCHI gt vian linktype 2 tagged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN Qinqmode lt port_list gt disable man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN 240 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R dot1q Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q Default Setting N A Example swircHvien ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 1 Example Add port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan add 10 17 24 VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt Parameters 241 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Delete port17 to port24 in VLAN10
125. and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial fra
126. and the number of incomplete transmissions per port e Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit The Detailed Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 4 3 appears Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Auto refresh L Rx Packets Tx Packets Rx Octets Tx Octets Rx Unicast Tx Unicast Rx Multicast Tx Multicast Rx Broadcast Tx Broadcast Rx Pause Tx Pause Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Rx Low Rx Normal Rx Medium Rx High Rx Drops Rx CRC Alignment Rx Undersize Rx Oversize Rx Fragments Rx Jabber Rx Filtered Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes Tx Low Tx Normal Tx Medium Tx High Tx Drops Tx L
127. and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet IPMC is an acronym for l MultiCast LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol is used for network discovery and works by having the units in the network exchanging information with their neighbors using LLDP frames MAC Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured
128. ant in the IEEE 802 1X specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients 141 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Oo Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays
129. ar No ports enabled O O OOOO O The page includes the following fields Object e Port e RSTP e STP e TCN e Discarded Unknown e Discarded Illegal Auto refresh L Figure 4 7 11 RSTP Statistics page screenshot Description The switch port number of the logical RSTP port The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port 117 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 8 Quality of Service 4 8 1 Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your
130. at hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame 161 MAC Parameters Object e SMAC Filter e SMAC Value e DMAC Filter e DMAC Value VLAN Parameters Object e VLAN ID Filter e VLAN ID e Tag Priority User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Description Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC valu
131. ate Exc Coll Figure 4 4 3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot 80 The page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object e Rx and Tx Packets e Rx and Tx Octets e Rx and Tx Unicast e Rx and Tx Multicast e Rx and Tx Broadcast e Rx and Tx Pause User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Description The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object e Rx Drops e Rx CRC Alignment e Rx Undersize e Rx Oversize e Rx Fragments e Rx Jabber e Rx Filtered Description The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion The number of frames received with CRC or a
132. ates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are e Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation e Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are e SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 e SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c e SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Indicates the SNMP trap destination address Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are e Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure e Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are e Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation e Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 68 e Trap Probe Security Engine ID e Trap Security Engine ID e Trap Security Name User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are e Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation e Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe securit
133. atiOMs A A a 159 411 2 AGE CONTIGUA ION O rl tia 161 AAs ONG CONIGUIaiON Wiza dieen E E pin 168 AAS dt Serup Poly RUGS a dt rae a neu NAE acee cade scunc cect E AE EATA 169 AAV 32 Setup POR PONGICS siii di a hcg stanton dex 170 4 11 3 3 Setup Typical Network Application Rules ooccooccccocccccocnccccnnococnncncnccnnnnnnnnnnnnocnnnnonanonnnnnnenaninnns 171 4 11 3 4 Setup Source MAC and Source IP BiNdiNg oocccccoccnnccnocnncnoncncnnnnonononcnnnnonnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnonnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnos 174 4 11 3 5 Setup DoS Attack Detection Rules occccoccccocncccccnccccncconncconnnononononononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonannnnaninnns 175 411 3 0 Set up Dos Attack Detection RUES ccoo a 176 A 71 4 ACL Rate Limiter Configura ON caia sabe encccesericadetadcadubens a aa 178 AeA OAC ls POR s Conigurati N seriei ceed nat A ia 179 4 12 Address Talitas 181 4 12 1 MAC Address Table Configuration cccccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeesaeeessaeeeeeas 181 412 2 Statie MAC Table Configurations e ge 182 412 3 MAC Address Table Status ii AI 183 WAG Tapie COMAS aia ico 183 413 Port Securty a lonsaesacabaxestdoeneccocateamcuacabiucaustanwedieeewetstetes 185 ALED P ias 187 41421 EINK Layer Discovery PrOtOCO sunrise e a oo tias 187 4 142 LEDP Configuratio ip A A a Gunes severe ra es 188 414S LEDP Ne O nbora ar ta o a ao A E Sale a 191 O Statisti A ek acetate eee ean ase daa a aus e
134. authorized and unauthorized clients count further new clients are disallowed access Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available state machines Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is Auto or MAC Based Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect e Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out port based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated ports clients and will not cause the port client to get temporarily unauthorized e Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the port clients and thereby a reauthentication immediately The port clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is ongoing 148 4 10 4 802 1X Port Status User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R This page provides an overview of the current IEEE 802 1X port states for the selected switch The 802 1X Port Status screen in Figure 4 10 5 appears 302 1X Status The page includes the following fields Object e Port e State e Last Source e Last ID 90 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disab
135. ax Aggr Mode smac dmaclip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode SWITCH gt Aggr mode smac disable 231 LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration SWITCH gt lacp configuration Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Key Role Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 232 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Disabled Active Disabled Active Disabled Active Disabled Active LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port
136. cast e Status Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type e Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps 131 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 9 Multicast 4 9 1 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to det
137. ce through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 210 5 2 Telnet login User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for password Port Numbers ANET i WGSW 24848 4 4 4 4 rat 4 1 Gi 81 4 4 4 4 pdt si Si Fi 4 4 or as 4 A E 4 4 4 4 4 F111 1131151 4 4 4 _ 1181281221241 4 4 rh rae ral i23 4 4 to get help 211 WOSW 246486 Command Line Interface User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management Aggr Lin
138. cify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears e Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware 163 e IP Ethernet Length e Ethernet E IP Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equa
139. ckers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management 37 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R WGSW SGSW Managed Switch mi E y er Serial Port Serial Port 115200 8 n 1 PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software Figure 3 1 Console management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 115200 bp
140. cording to its importance to that particular business type e QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s e Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how theSwitch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 118 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s 4 8 2 QoS Control List Configuration This page lists the QCEs for a given QCL Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QoS assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QoS Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 1 appears
141. d MAC based authentication is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames e RADIUS IP The IP address of the RADIUS Server expressed in dotted decimal notation If the RADIUS IP changes while the protocol is globally enabled then all ports clients will get reinitialized e RADIUS Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Server and the switchstack e Reauthentication Enabled e Reauthentication Period e EAP Timeout e Age Period e Hold Time User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R If checked clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Age Period below Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds Determines the time the switch shall wait for the supplicant response before retransmitting a packet Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds
142. d in the System Log e Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are e Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled e Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE The ACL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use IPv4 TCP 1863 MSN Out Deny Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 0 O Access Control List Configuration Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter IP TCP 1863 MSN In Deny Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 0 DOS e OG Refresh L Auto refresh Remove All Figure 4 11 7 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot 173 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 3 4 Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source IP and source MAC on specific port The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 11 8 appears Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source MAC and source IP on specific port Binding ron Enabled Source MAC Address Source IP Address 100 304F AA BB CC 1192 168 0 200
143. d return to the User Name list 14 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User ol Group Name public Security Model V3 v Security Level authPriv User Authentication Authentication Protocol MDS v AA 12345678 A A DESSS Y A 87654321 Figure 4 3 9 SNMPv3 Users NEW page screenshot Once the new SNMPv3 user be successed add and be assign to a snmp group this entry will shows in the users table SNMPv3 Users O SNMP_Manager public V3 authPriv MDS DESS6 Change Group Figure 4 3 10 SNMPv3 Users page screenshot E EXAMPLE Add a new SNMPv3 Group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read and write views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list 19 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SNMPv3 Groups New Group Properties Security Model V1 Y ASAS AR noAuthNoPriv SNMPv3 Views Read View defaultview v Write View Notify View O o O defaultview Sl O defaultview Figure 4 3 11 SNMPv3 Groups NEW page screenshot 76 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 4 Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following item
144. d state In this state frames from the client will not cause the switch to attempt to reauthenticate the client The Hold Time which can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds determines the time after an EAP Failure indication or RADIUS timeout that a client is not allowed access 145 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 10 3 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Port Configuration When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section The 802 1X Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 10 4 appears 0 802 1X Port Configuration 00 2 1 Disabled o02 1 Disabled a2 1 Disabled 90 1 Disabled oU2 1 Disabled a2 14 Disabled OU 14 Disabled a2 1 Disabled olz 14 Disabled OU 14 Disabled 90 21 Disabled 90 1 Disabled 90 21 Disabled 00 2 1 Disabled 002 1 Disabled a2 1 Disabled o0z 14 Disabled 90 1 Disabled aU 1 Disabled 90 1 Disabled O02 1 Disabled o0z 14 Disabled 002 1 Disabled a02 1 Disabled Max Clients ES a a MES a MES MES a ES MES a MES MES a MES MES a MES a MES a MES ES MES Figure 4 10 4 802 1X Port Configuration page screenshot The table has
145. d x1 M Rubber feet X4 M RS 232 DB9 male Console cable x1 M CB STX50 50cm stack cable x1 SGSW 24040 24040R only If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair 1 2 Product Description High Performance Cost effective Telecom class Gigabit solution for Enterprise backbone and Data Center Networking The PLANET Managed Switch is a L2 L4 Managed Gigabit Switch Since Gigabit network interface had become the basic equipment and requirement of Enterprise and Network Servers with 48Gbps switching fabric the MANAGED SWITCH can handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to a backbone or high capacity servers The powerful 12 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R QoS and Network Security features make it to meets the needs of effective data traffic control for both Campus and Enterprise such VoIP video streaming and multicast application High Performance The Managed Switch provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports with 4 shared Gigabit SFP slots It boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 48Gbps which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to incr
146. dentifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch E The path cost to the root from the transmitting port a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch 105 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following a One switch is elected as the root switch i The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root m A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch E Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When
147. details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration User Authentication SNTP Configuration Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Save Configuration Upload Factory Default System Reboot Provides basic system description including contact information Sets the IP address for management access Allows to configure the system password required to access the web pages or log in from CLI Simple Network Time Protocol Configures SNTP client settings including broadcast mode or aspecified list of servers Upgrade the firmware via Web browser Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server Save view the switch configuration to remote host Upload the switch configuration from remote host Reset the configuration of the Managed Switch Restarts the switch 47 4 2 1 System Information User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screen in Figure 4 2 1 appears The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Auto refresh Contact Name Location MAC Address System Date System Uptime Switch ID Software Version Software Date
148. disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting Enable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 SWITCH gt port power 1 4 disable Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard 224 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Example SWITCH gt port excessive 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt command gt The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics low Show low priority statistics normal Show normal priority statistics medium Show medium priority statistics high Show high priority statistics default Show all port statistics Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port
149. e Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID filter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care 162 ai ARP Parameters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object e ARP RARP e Request Reply e Sender IP Filter e Sender IP Addres
150. e Step 2 Check the Master LED of each SGSW switch to find out the Master Switch that is elected automatically by the stack operation Step 3 Use the Web browser such as IE 6 0 to login the Master Switch the default IP address is 192 168 0 100 Or you can use the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to find out the IP address of the stack group Y PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help MAC Address 00 30 4F 24 24 C1 SGSW 24040 05080827 F 192 168 0 100 192 MA 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 PLANET SGSw 24040 select Adapter 192 168 3 52 00 02 B3 EC 9D CF Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Device Update Multi Update All Connect to Device Device SGSW 24040 00 30 4F 24 24 C1 Get Device Information done Figure 4 16 11 Use PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of stack master Step 4 Choose Stack Stack Configuration from menu tree You can see the Stack had established automaticatlly As the below screen appears 1 The Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switches 2 All switches with same Priority value 3 3 The one can t be delete is the Stack master 205 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Stack Configuration soob __ SL Delete Stack Member Switch ID Switch Type Capable 00 30 4 24 24 c1 Yes 3 PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O 00 30 4 24 04 76 E Yes 34 PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch J 00 30 4f 24 0
151. e mirror port 83 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R a SGSW Stackable Switch The SGSW Stackable switch supports port mirror function over stack switch Port Mirror Configuration Stack Global Settings Port to mirror to La Switch to mirror to ad anfictiea Switch 2 Port Con ifa Mirror Port Configur Switch 3 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Figure 4 4 6 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot Object Description e Switch to mirror to Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are mirrored to this switch 84 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 5 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the s
152. e same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 5 4 appears LACP Port Configuration Port LACP Enabled LI LI d LI d LI L Pi L Pi Active L Auto w Auto w Actve Auto w Active Auto se Actve Y Auto se Actwe Y Auto se Actve Auto se Actve Auto se Actve Auto Active O Oo 0 vA 0 Mm WwW Ff Active Y la Auto e CUCU Figure 4 5 4 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack e Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto e Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets 89 User s Manual of WGSW 2
153. e 4 2 21 Download system configuration screenshot If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up 63 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu Example 4 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration files can be later downloaded to restore the Managed Switch s settings 1 Click System File Management Copy Operation 2 Select running config to tftp or startup config to tftp as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server 3 Enter a new file name for the configuration to upload and click Apply Copy running config to tftp A Ue Ces 192 168 0 52 Destination File Name sw 1_Conf cfg Figure 4 2 22 Upload system configuration screenshot The file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the Managed Switch The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space 64 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol 4 3 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer pr
154. e 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each
155. e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE e 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry e 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care 167 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R m Ethernet Type Parameters The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object Description e EtherType Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears e Ethernet Type Value When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 4 11 3 ACL Configuration wizard This handy wizard helps you set up an ACL quickly The ACL Configuration wizard screen in Figure 4 11 2 appears Welcome to the ACL Configuration Wizard Please select an action Set up Policy Rules set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Set up Port Policies Group ports into several type
156. e default settings as below Until the PWR LED lit off Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 HM Stack ID SGSW 24040 and SGSW 24040R only Each SGSW Managed Stackable Switch on a stack must have a unique Stack ID There are 16 degrees 0 9 A F in the rotary switch The Stack ID is configured via Web or CLI management interface Use the Stack ID to identify the localtion of the real device Stack ID is not equals to the Master Priority that configured in the management interface Ml Master LED SGSW 24040 and SGSW 24040R only If master switch is fail or disconnected to the switch by stack port the switch with least switch ID will become master 20 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 2 1 2 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity system operation Stack status and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LED indication gt PLANET wasw 24040 Networking amp Communication c ho aan Nm Ny Console JE JPA 115200 N 8 1 Reset PWR ACT 10 100 E amp 0 e hy E oe Figure 2 3 WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R LED panel Function Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure Mm 10 100 1000Base T interfaces
157. e domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 290 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 7 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base TX Full Duplex 291 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 292 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 8 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual E The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch Mi Some stations cann
158. e image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again 55 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 2 7 Configuration Save This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The screen in Figure 4 2 10 appears Configuration Save save configuration Figure 4 2 10 Configuration Save page screenshot Configuration Download Download the current configuration file of the switch to the local machine m Configuration Download 1 Press the Download button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 2 11 and 4 2 12 appear File Download Do pou want bo open or save the He O r Name 630 8005 ct g Type From 192 166 0 100 Open Save i A While es from the mierak can be useful some files can poterfialy ham your compuber ycu do not hust the source do not open ol zava this file Y has the mk Figure 4 2 11 File Download screen 2 Chose the file save path in management workstation 96 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R n E Configuration Hie Recent Documents File pame GSD ct My Network Save as pe Micrasall fle Qullook Beas Figure 4 2 12 File save screen 4 2 8 Configuration Upload
159. e other end to the STX2 Cascade UP port of next device STEP 2 Repeat the step for every device in the stack cluster then ending at last switch SIX1V SIX 2A eq Cascade Down CO Figure 2 18 Stacking connection STEP 3 If you wish to implement stack redundancy use the long stack cable CB STX200 to connect the stack port marked STX1 Cascade Down on the bottom switch to the port marked STX2 Cascade Up on the top switch of the stack The stack port is for management and data packets to be transmitted between other SGSW stackable switches the stack ports can t be configured with Layer 2 features via management interface Note STEP 4 Power up the stack switches 2 3 2 Management Stacking The stack operation of the SGSW Managed Switch supports Plug and Play Stacking connection and auto stack configuration 33 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R STEP 5 Once the stack start operation the Stack master be automatically elected without any configure The Stack master is indicated by a lit green Master LED on the front panel As the Figure 2 19 appears esesecesocesecesececececscseocseoseseso esesesesesesesesececeosecesecesecseceso 24040 4 se se se LN a 24040 it e es 2 4 i j gt o ister ee eeee Figure 2 19 Stack Master with Master LED lit STEP 6 When a SGSW Switch is added to the stack a Switch
160. e received IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value 6 bits against the two DSCP values in the QCE Key e ToS Uses the precedence part of the IPv4 IPv6 ToS 3 bits as an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key e Tag Priority Uses the User Priority value 3 bits as an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key e Type Value Configure the values according to the QCE type you select e Ethernet Type The allowed values for this type range from 0x600 1536 to OxFFFF 65535 e VLAN ID The allowed values for this type range from 1 to 4095 e TCP UDP Port Range Specify whether there is a range or a specific port number The port range allowed is from 0 to 65535 e DSCP The allowed range is 0 to 63 ToS or Tag Priority do not have type value settings e Traffic Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE If the QCE type is ToS or Tag Priority there are 8 rows of traffic class that can be configured for each priority 4 8 3 Port QoS Configuration This page allows you to configure QoS settings for each port Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QCL that is assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames no
161. e root port Port Cost STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Enable state A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports O Auto Default Value STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 68 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not 108 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not b
162. e to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides 1 It is recommended to use Internet Explore 6 0 or above to access Managed Switch The changed IP address take effect immediately after click on the Save button you need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface 44 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 1 Main WEB PAGE The WGSW SGSW Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Main Functions Menu Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status 3 PLANET N A WGSW 2 4040 System SNMP t Port Management Link Aggregation gt VLAN Spanning Tree Welcome to PLAN ET Multicast gt Qos WGSW 24040 802 1 Authentication t Access Control List gt MAC Address Table 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP LLDP gt Diagnostics Management Switch Security HELP Main Screen PLANET Technology Corporation 11F No 96
163. e used to represent the priority component of a Bridge Identifier e Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 200 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 e Protocol Version The STP compatibility mode setting Normal Rapid STP 802 1w Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops 111 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Compatible Classis STP 802 1d Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol While select Compatibles mode the system use the RSTP 802 1w to compatible and co work with another STP 802 1d s BPDU control packets 4 7 2 RSTP Bridge Status This page provides a status overview for all RSTP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each RSTP bridge instance where the column displays the following information
164. e_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 260 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R QoS Mode Description Set or show the port egress scheduler mode Syntax QoS Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show QoS mode Default Setting Strict Example Set weighted mode for port15 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt qos mode 15 weighted QoS Weight Description Set or show the port egress scheduler weight Syntax QoS Weight lt port_list gt lt class gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 lt weight gt Traffic class weight 1 2 4 8 QoS Rate Limiter Description Set or show the port rate limiter 261 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Syntax QoS Rate Limiter lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable rate limiter disable Disable rate limiter default Show rate limiter mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps rate limiter for port17
165. ease bandwidth demands Robust Layer 2 Features The Managed can be programmed for basic switch management functions such as port speed configuration Port aggregation VLAN Spanning Tree protocol QoS bandwidth control and IGMP Snooping The WGSW 24040 provides 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Q in Q VLAN trunning and private VLAN the VLAN groups allowed on the WGSW 24040 will be maximally up to 4k Via supporting port aggregation the Managed Switch allows the operation of a high speed trunk combining multiple ports up to eight groups of maximum to 8 ports for trunking and it supports fail over as well Excellent Traffic Control PLANET WGSW 24040 is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms The functionality includes QoS features such as wire speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular useful for multi tenant unit multi business unit Telco or Network Service Provide applications It also empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance at VoIP and Video conferencing transmission Efficient Management For efficient management the series of Managed Switch is equipped with console WEB and SNMP management interfaces With its built in Web based management it offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The Managed Switch supports standard Simple Network Manage
166. ed Switch v1 0b060827 Mo 00 30 4f 24 04 al v1 0b060827 No Figure 4 16 8 Stack Information page screenshot Stack List The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Deletes this switch from the stack configuration e Stack Member The MAC address of the switch e Switch ID The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a switch For more information see description of Switch IDs e Master Capable Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master An unmanaged switch for example will not be Master Capable e Master Priority The priority that the switch has in the master election process The smaller the priority the more likely the switch will become master during the master election process e Switch Type The product name of the switch e Start Master Election By checking this option the Save operation will also start the master election process This is done by clicking Start Master Election followed by Save This causes the first two criteria to be ignored thereby basing master election only on master priority and MAC address When master election is enforced the first two criteria are ignored for a period of 10 15 seconds m Master Forwarding Table As the heading suggests the information in the table is as seen from the master view For each switch in the stack the following information is shown e The MAC address switch ID distance information and the primary forwarding path to the
167. edium or High to apply to the QCE The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use QoS Control List Configuration a OCE Type Type Value Traffic Class Tag Priority 128 4 8 5 QoS Statistics User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 8 12 appears QoS Statistics O dl 2 3 4 a b E o d 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 15 a 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 20 21 dd 2d 24 a 0 a OS OS OO SO SO eS OS Oe OO eS Oo eS Oo AA The page includes the following fields Object Port Low Queue Normal Queue Medium Queue High Queue Receive Transmit 0 0 O T 0 0 0 0 mn 0 GA ee O ee ee ee ee ee ee ee O SO eS CO ee OC ee OO ee OO ee OO ee OO ee OO ee OO ies OO ees O A n Oe Oe OC eS OC ee OC ee O ee O ee O ee O ee A ee SS OS OO a OS Oe OR OR OR Oe Oo eS Oe SD SS OS OS OS OS Oe ORS OR OS Oo eS OO om ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee O A n mn D m SO SS OO SO E OS OS Oe Oe OSS OO eS OO A n Auto refresh L Figure 4 8 12 QoS Statistics page screenshot Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row There are 4 QoS queues per port with strict or weighted queuing scheduling This is the lowest priority qu
168. ee EE KAO RE A EE EARE RUSEN EAS 39 3 5 SNMP Based Network Manageme nt cccssccccseeseeeecsseecceeneesseeseeeseeseeeeeaeneeesnenseeeaseessoaaseeseneneesenseneessons 40 O FOLOGOUS AAA AAA AAA AAA AA AA 40 3 6 1 Virtual Terminal Protocols ooccooccconcocnconcconcocnccnconoconnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninanens 40 AA o os AAA A gn ee ee er 41 3 0 9 ManagementArchlte cl veria data 41 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 WEB CONFIGURATION sssetcccacceciccclcccnccadecacecdd ctbosudscbdocudscbhecedssddocedlondcccddaticaddextentemvesieerest 42 41T Mal WEB PAGE usais tl a a ld 45 AZ SY SUC IM A NO 47 ES a les o dela 48 B22 A A 50 A USA O UA 51 A 2 A SNTE CONNU On dd is 52 ALO WEB Firmware Upgrade ss cie o a laren 53 4 2 6 TFTP Firmware AAA O O A IO O Rete saetiaes 54 AL AGORA QUAN AV a a a e bet NA a a o a a 56 420 GOMA Upload seeriana a ae ti ee ee 57 PA o DE A a a hoes Searels tite a a hats eee heh ll 59 42 IES ReDOO uena a e aa Adee ies ea Sak te cineca cused aren via aiT ea 60 4 3 Simple Network Management Protocol ccccsseeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeneseeeeeasneeeeeeeeenenseesoesessenaneesenseneessoes 65 ASS NIV OV CIVIC WY rata aieanaautd eseat E ease deus casa teas AEA 65 4 322 SNMP System Configura lO A E xd notes pales weed ee aces 65 4 3 3 SNMP System Information Configuration sissies iiini iaeei a eia a iaa 67 4 3 4
169. eed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation ARP ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system Auto Negotiation Auto negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link 297 DES DHCP DNS DoS User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by net
170. een received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decisio
171. egular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X IGMP IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gami
172. em and a port wide 140 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 10 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication ba switch RADIUS switch Workstations E clients 5 Ol a YT Figure 4 10 1 Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplic
173. er address Syntax System SNTP lt ip_addr gt 215 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set SNTP server SWITCH gt system sntp 220 130 158 52 System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 Example To set timezone Switch gt system timezone 0 System Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax System Firmware Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters 216 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_name gt Firmware file name 217 IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration Switch gt ip configuration DHCP Client Disabled IP Address 192 168 100 105 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 100 1 VLAN ID mal SNTP Server 0 0 0 0 IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enable disable Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Dis
174. ermine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network A Give me multicast Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter A o MF 0 a gt gt IPTV O gt Server Router Switch Multicast Receiver Give me multicast stream Switch Give me multicast fa stream Multicast pam lt a Receiver D Figure 4 9 1 Multicast Service 132 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter A IPTV Server Router C Multicast Receiver Idon twant Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 9 2 Multicast flooding B Multicast l Receiver Multicast IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch A IPTV Server IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Switch Switch C IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 9 3 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control 133 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined i
175. ermitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled Select which port frames are copied to The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are e Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log e Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabledi If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counts the number of frames that match this ACE 180 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 12 Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The f
176. es use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 16 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 12 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group
177. ess Tale O e a e a E o arate 290 EP O ea a 290 Tas Forwarding Pinte ring aoia A A E A 290 TASTE AMA EOI Ads 290 he PUNGGOL AU OU ao iio 291 S TROUBLE SHOOTING cues idas 293 APPENDE Aaa AAN 295 A SWichs RIAS PIN ASSIGNMGINS iniciaran bad 295 A Z 10 TOOMDpS TOMO0OBasSe T Ainara 295 APPENDEX B GEOSSAR Vosotros 297 11 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 1 INTRODUTION The PLANET Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch series WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R are all multiple ports Gigabit Ethernet Switched with SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features the description of these models as below 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch Redundant Power 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Stackable Switch SGSW 24040R 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Stackable Switch Redundant Power Terms of Managed Switch means the Switches mentioned titled in the cover page of this User s manual i e WGSW 24040 and SGSW 24040 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items Check the contents of your package for following parts M The Managed Switch x1 M User s manual CD x1 M Quick installation guide x1 M 19 Rack mount accessory kit x1 M Power cor
178. established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions E Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements E Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups E Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree E Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used al The unique switch identifier The path cost to the root associated with each switch port a The por tidentifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information E The unique i
179. ete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of l WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 Shared SFP Combo Managed Switch User s Manual FOR MODELS WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R REV
180. etwork management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization Switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking 106 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Switch Blocking tg Disable Learning Fora Figure 4 7 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Br
181. eue This is the normal priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Low Queue This is the medium priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Normal Queue This is the highest priority queue of the 4 QoS queues The number of received and transmitted packets per port 129 4 8 6 Bandwidth Control User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Configure the switch port rate limit for Policers and Shapers on this page The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen Bandwidth Control in Figure 4 8 13 appears The page includes the following fields Bandwidth Control Configuration Policer Port Enabled 1 O oO 0 wH M M0 E 0 hi L Object Port Policer Enabled Policer Rate Policer Unit Shaper Enabled Shaper Rate Shaper Unit k fee fije ff fe fe Policer Policer Shaper Shaper Shaper Rate Unit Enabled Rate Unit 500 500 500 500 AOU kbps k fee fije ff fe fe Figure 4 8 13 XXXXXXX page screenshot Description The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Enable or disable the port policer The default value is Disabled Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps Configure
182. exactly the same with RS 232 console management 3 6 2 SNMP Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the standard management protocol for multi vendor IP networks SNMP supports transaction based queries that allow the protocol to format messages and to transmit information between reporting devices and data collection programs SNMP runs on top of the User Datagram Protocol UDP offering a connectionless mode service 3 6 3 Management Architecture All of the management application modules use the same Messaging Application Programming Interface MAPI By unifying management methods with a single MAPI configuration parameters set using one method console port for example are immediately displayable by the other management methods for example SNMP agent of Web browser The management architecture of the switch adheres to the IEEE open standard This compliance assures customers that the Managed Switch is compatible with and will interoperate with other solutions that adhere to the same open standard 41 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web Based Management su
183. f multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are 307 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs 308
184. f the counters between port and MAC based authentication as shown below RADIUS Counters recon mame EENe ewe Port based Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first request from the RADIUS server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the RADIUS server has dot1xAuthBackendAccessCh Access Challenges communication with the switch allenges MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the RADIUS server for this port left most table or client right most table Port and MAC based dot1xAuthBackendAuthSucce Counts the number of times that the switch receives a Auth Successes sses success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the RADIUS server Port and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure Auth Failures dot1xAuthBackendAuthFails message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the RADIUS server Port based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send dot1xAuthBackendResponse Responses a supplicant s first response packet to the RADIUS server S Indicates the switch attempted communication with the RADIUS server Possible retransmissions are not counted Port based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP dot1xAuthBackendOtherRequ Request packet following the first to the supplicant Indicates Rx Other Requests e
185. ge out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch MAC Table Learning Port Security MAC Table Learning for Switch 1 Port Members o pijajajajsje6jz7jsejojioji1 12f13 14 15 16 17 1 fluo OOOO aa AA OOO Disable O COOOOCOOOCOOOOOOOOOO Secure OOO 00 00 00 00 00 000 Figure 4 13 1 Port Security Settings screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done e Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped 185 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface 186 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 14 LLDP 4 14 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802
186. ged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging Mi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame M Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch E Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration 97 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 6 3 VLAN Basic I
187. gement IP address for the stack is also preserved for uninterrupted management and monitoring 199 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Figure 4 16 4 Remove or Replace a switch from the stack 4 16 1 4 Shortest Path Forwarding The SGSW Swtich supports shortest path forwarding technology to optimal data flow across the stack The advantage of shortest path forwarding as below NW Automatic Loop Prevention Using Time To Live TTL information in the stack header NW Utilize all stack links in the ring SGSW Switch 1 Load per stack link CL TD SGSW Switch 2 SGSW Switch 3 Figure 4 16 5 True Ring Topology 200 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 16 2 Stack Configuration This page is used for configure the stack include assign Switch ID master priority and display the current stack member information The screen in Figure 4 16 6appears Stack Configuration Delete Stack Member Switch p Master Switch Type 00 30 4 24 24 01 1 104 PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch 00 30 4f 24 04 01 2 M f gr 3 w PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch 00 30 4f 24 04 76 3 M Ye 14 w PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch 00 30 4f 24 04 a1 4 M e 4 PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch C Start Master Election Figure 4 16 6 Stack Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Dele
188. gs All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 6 2 appears VLAN Port Configuration IEEE 80210 ee Set out layer Q in Q Mode YLAN tag ether type Link Type Port Ingress Acceptable Filtering Frame Type iL O Al untes Decble EE sf a a a sf a a 6 1 CI Unteg w Disable rO o M v UnTeg Disable of yo of a E 1 OD la lores e Disable w Figure 4 6 2 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the 100 e Ingress Filtering e Accept Frame Type e Link Type e Q in Q Mode e Set Out layer VLAN tag ether type e Port VLAN ID User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R untagged traffic will be dropped Enable ingress filtering for a port
189. he Reset button in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release the current setting includes VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode 91 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 2 4 SNTP Configuration In the System sub function menu you can see the SNTP Configuration see Figure 4 4 by which you can configure the time settings for the Managed Switch You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Timezone The SNTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 2 4 appears SNTP Configuration SNTP Server 0 0 0 0 Timezone Offset minutes System Date 1970 01 01 00 12 25 0000 System Uptime Od 00 12 25 Figure 4 2 4 SNTP Configuration page screenshot The Time page includes the following fields Object e SNTP Server e Timezone Offset e System Date e System Uptime Description Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation Enter a user defined SNTP server IP addresses or hostname This is a text string of up to 64 characters containing the encoded unicast IP address or hostname of a SNTP server Unicast SNTP requests will be sent to this address If this address is a DNS hostname then that hostname should be resolved into an IP address each time a SNTP request is sent to it Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720
190. he specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule o Audio and Video J QuickTime 4 Server MSN Messenger Phone Yahoo Messenger Phone Napster Real Audio o Games Ol Blizzard Battlenet Diablo and StarCraft Fighter Ace ll Quake2 Quake3 MSN Game Zone o User Definition DJ Ethernet Type OVLANID TCP UDP Pot ODScP Figure 4 8 7 Set up Typical Netowrk Application Rules page screenshot The page includes the folling fileds Object Description e Audio and Video Indicates the common servers that apply to the specific QCE The common servers are e QuickTime 4 Server e MSN Messenger Phone e Yahoo Messenger Phone e Napster e Real Audio e Games Indicates the common games that apply to the specific QCE 125 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R e User Definition Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific ACE The user definitions are e Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF e VLAN ID VLAN ID filter for this QCE The allowed range is 1 to 4095 e UDP TCP Port Specify the TCP UDP port filter for this QCE The allowed range is O to 65535 e DSCP Specify the DSCP filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0 to 63 Buttons Cancal Wizard Click to cancel the wizard lt Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Netx
191. he timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes 50 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Save Click to save changes Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 4 2 3 User Authentication This page allows you to configure the system password required to access the web pages or log in from CLI After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login web interface with new password the screen in Figure 4 2 3 appears User Authentication Old Password New Password Password nae New Password Save Figure 4 2 3 User Authentication page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Old Password Enter the current system password If this is incorrect the new password will not be set e New Password The system password The allowed string length is 0 to 31 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 It will not display as it is typed only asterisks will show Passwords are alpha numeric characters in length and are case sensitive e Confirm New The new password must be entered twice to catch typing errors To confirm that Password you entered it correctly this field will not display but will show asterisks After change the default password if you forget the password Please press t
192. hernet Port on unit 1 port 2 Bridge 192 168 100 101 IPv4 Auto refresh Figure 4 14 3 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot The columns hold the following information Object Description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit e System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other Repeater Bridge WLAN Access Point Router Telephone DOCSIS cable device 0 N O O A O N Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by e Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbor s IP address 191 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 14 4 LLDP Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch whi
193. hn Se 94 4 6 35 VEAN Basic MOMO co 98 AMAN POEMA e ad le 99 4 6 5 VLAN Membership Configuration coocccccoccnccnocnnnonncnnononennnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnonnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnrnnnnanrnnnnnnrnrnnnrrnrnnaninns 102 100 Private VEAN COMIUT O N Na a tia cei aia 103 47 Rapid spanning Tree Protocol iia AS 105 ATL RSTPOysten CONG ULALOM nis tactic E R 111 ET 2 RS TE Bridge Salsa pi bid 112 Ako RS TE Port Conig ratio Nr A ia 113 LARA RS TP FO SAUS sia 116 A RIRS ee POT SAISICS sra a a nin acces towne ata aad euaaiae medenatarte 117 AG Quality Of Service aiea A A a a e E 118 4e UAderstana IO Saad ali ll aldo a 118 AZ MOS ORTO ISE AAA e ral 119 4 8 2 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration ccoooccnccccccncccnnnncnnncnnnnncnnonnncnnononcnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnrnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnrinnnns 120 4e o A ds Mel ah hs hk oe 121 4 94 OCL Configurauon Wizard cnc neat a ee ee 123 ASA Se LURO RUNG Se deere tee 123 4 8 4 2 Setup Typical Network Application RU EBS coooocccoccccocccccoccnconcnononoconcnnnnnnnonononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 125 4 8 4 3 Setup ToS Precedence MappiNQ cccocccccccocccnconcncnoccnonncncnnnnononnnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnarinnns 127 4 8 4 4 Setup VLAN Tag Priority Mapping cccoooconcconcnococoncnonconoconcnnononnnnonnnonononcnnononnnnnnnnnnononrnnnnrnnnnnnnanannnnns 128 AA EE ECO ee ere er ee ee ee eer ree ere 129 4 8 6 Bandwidth COMO laa da ara ora Eaa E AEREE aea 130
194. id EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAP Resp ID frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL response frames other than Resp ID frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL logoff frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAP initial request frames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAP Request frames other than initial request frames that have been transmitted by the switch User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R RADIUS Counters RADIUS Server frame counter statistics For MAC based ports there are two tables containing RADIUS counters The left most shows a summary of all RADIUS counters on this port The right most shows RADIUS counters for the currently selected client or dashes if no client is selected or available A client can be selected from the list of authorized unauthorized clients below the two counter tables There are slight differences in the interpretation o
195. ide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all 94 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R ports and work normally Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allow VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header HM 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is c
196. idge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC 107 Priority Hello Time Maximum Age Timer Forward Delay Timer User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Default Value 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being Variable Description Port Priority A relative priority for each elected as th
197. ighbors Entries Dropped e Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out Local Counters User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object e Local Port e Tx Frames e Rx Frames e Rx Errors e Frames Discarded e TLVs Discarded e TLVs Unrecognized e Org Discarded e Age Outs Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type
198. inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 99 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN ta
199. ion 1 Check that modules are installed correctly 2 PLANET CB STX50 or CB STX200 cables not installed correctly LEDs on front panel STX1 or STX2 do not light 3 Check that the cables are inserted correctly 4 The stack cable is PLANET proprietary stack cable the stack cable is cross overed HDMI like cable the normal HDMI cable can t be used for the SGSW series NW While IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx gt PLANET wasw 24040 Networking amp Communication Console o y 17 1 0 gt O o i eee v 10 100 115200 N 8 1 Reset PWR 1000 ACT Reset 294 A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T O N carn a Bb QQ ND Bl_DA BI_DA Bl_DB Bl_DC BI_DC BI_DB BI_DD BI_DD User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Bl_DB BI_DB Bl_DA BI_DD BI_DD BI_DA BI_DC BI_DC SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R APPENDEX A Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another swi
200. is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state
201. itch IDs are used to uniquely identify the Managed Switches within a stack The Switch ID of each Managed Switch is shown on the display on the front of the Managed Switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands of the Stack group saxo 1 2 3fa s e 7 ofo afjojo a REESE ESERIES 2 1 3 Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accept input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 5 to Figure 2 8 shows the rear panel of these Managed Switches WGSW 24040 Rear Panel POWER ON Figure 2 5 Rear panel of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R Rear Panel POWER ON Figure 2 6 Rear panel of WGSW 24040R 23 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 Rear Panel POWER ON a 0 OFT 50 60HZ POWER 100 240V AC ON 8 witch DC n IC wire G OFF 50 60HZ Figure 2 8 Rear panel of SGSW 24040R Mi AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range 100 240VAC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready The device is a power required device it means it will not work till it is powered If your networ
202. k Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Dot1x IEEE 802 1X port authentication IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol snooping LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN QoS Quality of Service ACL Access Control List Mirror Port mirroring SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Stack Stack management Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP 6 1 System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax System Configuration all lt port_list gt Parameters 212 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example To display system information Switch gt system configuration System Name SGSW 24040 System Password admin CLI Prompt Switch Timezone Offset 0 MAC Address 00 30 4f 24 04 03 System Time 1970 01 01 03 13 21 0000 System Uptime 03 13 21 SID Software Version Beta_080813 System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings Switch gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip 213 User s Manual of
203. k unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 5 appears IGMP Snooping Configuration Global Configuration snooping Enabled Unregistered IPRC Flooding enabled LAN ID Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier d l Figure 4 9 5 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMC Flooding enabled VLAN ID IGMP Snooping Enabled IGMP Querier Description Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding The VLAN ID of the entry Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN The Querier will send out if no Querier received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled Each Querier s interval is 125 second and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from other devices 136 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 9 3 IGMP Port Related Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Port Related Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 6 appears IGMP Port Related Configuration Port Router Port Fast Leave 1 O d 2 d d 3 O d 4 d d 5 d d E d d 7 d d z d d 9 LI d 10 d d 11 F C 12 F C 13
204. ks should active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will Power Notice prevent you from network data loss or network downtime In some area installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter Mi Stack ports SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R There are two High Performance stack ports on the rear panel One is STX1 Cascade Down and the other is STX2 Cascade UP e When stacked the STX1 Cascade Down port should connect to the other switch s STX2 Cascade UP port and the STX2 Cascade UP port should connect to other switch s STX1 Cascade Down out e You can just use attached PLANET CB STX50 or longer stack cable CB STX200 connector to stack e The CB STX50 and CB STX200 are Cross Overed HDMI cables only attached PLANET stack cable can be used Plug and play connection 24 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SIX 1V Cascade Down Cascade UP Figure 2 9 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Stack Ports Mi DC Power Connector The rear panel of the WGSW 24040R and SGSW 24040R contains a power switch and a DC power connector which accepts DC power input voltage from 30V to 60V DC Connect the power cable to the Managed Switch at the input terminal block The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3 5 POWER ON
205. l over port density uplinks and switch stack performance Up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed The stacking technology also enables the advantages of chassis based switches to be integrated into SGSW Series Managed Switch but without the expensive up front cost AC DC Power Redundant to ensure continuous operation The R series Managed Switch equip with one 100 240V AC power supply unit and one DC 48V power supply unit on its standard package it provides redundant power supply installation A redundant power system is also provided to enhance the reliability with either 100 240V AC power supply unit or DC 48V power supply unit The continuous power systems are specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity available 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE The section describes how to use the Command Line interface CLI Section 6 CLI CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch
206. l parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here Object e Ingress Port e Switch e Frame Type e Action e Rate Limiter e Port Copy e Logging e Shutdown e Counter Description Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 Select the switch to which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch Select the frame type for this ACE Any Any frame can match this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Frames th
207. l to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object e IP Protocol Filter Description Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter Pv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file
208. le 1 Save Current Configuration setting To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as startup configuration The startup configuration file will be load automatically across a system reboot 1 Click System File Management Copy Operation 2 Select running config to startup config as the file transfer method 3 Select the startup file name used for startup on the Managed Switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply Copy running config to startup config vi Startup File Name Figure 4 2 17 Configuration saving screenshot You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Management Set Start Up page Note 4 Ifyou specify a new file name to startup config click System File Management Set Start up to check the specified file be set to Y in the Startup column Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 548 startupl cfg Config_File Y 2310 FW SGSW2840_vx3_runtime bix Operation_Code N 3083024 O run 1104 Operation_Code Y 3082624 Figure 4 2 18 Set Start up screenshot 61 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R E Example 2 Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace
209. le local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears Global Counters Neighbor entries were last changed at 5569 sec ago Total Neighbors Entries Added O Total Neighbors Entries Deleted O Total Neighbors Entries Dropped O Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out O Auto refresh I LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port Tx Frames Rx Frames Rx Errors Frames Discarded TLYs Discarded TLYs Unrecognized Org Discarded Age Outs 0 O 0 O 0 0 OO fe Ofte O el O el O te O a O he O fl Oe O eS OO Ml O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Oe O te O te O ef Oe Oe Oe O eS O ef OS O ef oao Ome Oe Ot O te O te O ie O eS O eS O El O iS O eS O OO te O te O lol O te O le O he O eS O El O eS O O O Oe O lol O te O lol O te O te O he O O O l O O A Oe O fe Oe O lol O fe O te O f O O O O Mm O Oe O fe O te O lol Oe O te O te O O ll O O Mm O Figure 4 14 4 LLDP Statistics page screenshot a Global Counters Object Description e Neighbor entries were Shows the time for when the last entry was last deleted or added It is also shows last changed at the time elapsed since last change was detected e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Entries Added e Total Neighbors Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Entries Deleted 192 e Total Ne
210. le mirror mode for port20 SWITCH gt mirror mode 20 enable 228 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 6 3 Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Example SWITCH gt aggr configuration Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Default Setting Disable Example Add port 1 4 in Group1 SWITCH gt aggr add 1 4 1 229 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Example Delete Group2 switcHagar delete 2 Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Example Show aggregation status SWITCH gt aggr lookup 1 Aggr ID Name Type GLAG1 Static 230 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Synt
211. le screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 12 27 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 080000 4 0008000 Figure 2 12 Mounting SGSW 2840 in a Rack Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Managed Switch As the Figure 2 13 appears 1000Base SX LX LC Fiber Figure 2 13 Plug in the SFP transceiver 28 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Mi MGB SX SFP 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver Multi mode 850nm 220m 550m Mi MGB LX SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 10km Mi MGB L30 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 30km Mi MGB L50 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 50km Mi MGB LA10 SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver WDM Single mode TX 1310nm RX 1550nm 10km
212. learned e Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 15 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are e Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log e Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are e Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled e Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row 5 Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list amp Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings 160 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 2 ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of severa
213. led oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled 90 1 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled o02 1 Disabled oU2 14 Disabled oU2 1 Disabled oU2 1 Disabled Auto refresh L Figure 4 10 5 802 1X Status page screenshot 1 2 3 4 al z E a 4 0 11 12 13 ple 15 16 i 15 J 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 20 21 e 23 24 Description The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed 802 1X statistics for this port The current state of the port Refer to IEEE 802 1X Port State for a description of the individual states The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for port based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Resp ID 149 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R EAPOL frame for port based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication 4 10 5 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Statistics This page provides detailed IEEE 802 1X statistics for a specific switch port running port based authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected RA
214. lignment errors The number of short frames received with valid CRC The number of long frames received with valid CRC The number of short frames received with invalid CRC The number of long frames received with invalid CRC The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port 81 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Transmit Error Counters Object Description e Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion e Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions 4 4 4 Port Mirroring Configuration Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity
215. ll duplex auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto Example Set 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 SWITCH gt port mode 1 10hdx Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode 222 Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt port flow control 1 enable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 Example Set 2048 frame size for port SWITCH gt port maxframe 1 2048 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control
216. me any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a syst
217. mea ee angatetea atu men eee ate ea eee 192 A19 NetWork DIAGNASUGS iii tt 194 419 11 able Diagnosis vir o A a 194 POM 2 A sacha se ececc asset ee se occas oeguns nase deans eee ae sss ac aais eggs nage deans A arses ease ats eece ag aaa 195 AAG StaC KiNG o E 196 PP Oe Re me em ee ee 198 AAA He L G peter er meer e o aoe eee ne a rere 198 416 T2 Master EIS CUOMN sea chret ates een vices occas cee as ee E ase ee 199 Ae G2 129 Sta CK Redundans ts saci aeieds ohsn e ae a See een 199 4 16 1 4 Shortest Path Forwarding cccccccccccseeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeesaeeeeesesensaees 200 A10 eA gt Gs CON UN a See Roe eee 201 416 3 SLACK IO Maldad ds didas 202 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 164 Stack FOr State OV CW VS Wisin eibar 204 4109 Stack Example Me en nr A AA eee 205 5 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE isieccceceracecnceceleciedenehectberatecuteratecstectalecelonesstenciecitdeiieitdetiiactis 208 91 ACCESSINO Me Clan 208 LOGOM to the CONSE taea dies 208 Oxo a6 Octal eae 2 hs nic eee meer eae enter Pte nes eee 209 9 2 1SMet lO Morris 211 6 Command LING MOC vias 212 Ged SV SCENT Comman aiii incas 212 System GOMMOULAL OM r eelcnes A A AS at 212 DV SICI IRODOOL siti A A A 213 System Restore Der ia 213 SIS tem Names A AS 214 SVS US NO cigs ee seh addon heared ai ude is iii it 214 SV SUSI ASS WO scsi dee a anes ba ee a a oaeega eens
218. ment Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management it can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port Powerful Security The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms also comprise of port based 802 1x and MAC based user and device authentication The port security is effective in limit the numbers of clients pass through so that network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before Flexibility and Extension solution The 4 mini GBIC slots are compatible with 1000Base SX LX and WDM SFP Small Factor Pluggable fiber optic modules The distance can be extended from 550 meters Multi Mode fiber up to above 10 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for using within the enterprise data centers and distributions 13 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Reliability Stacking Management The SGSW Series Managed Switch provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP address That helps network managers to easily configure switches via one single IP address instead of connecting and setting each unit one by one Through its high bandwidth tunnel and stacking technology it gives enterprise service provider and telcom flexible contro
219. minutes Display the current local date and time UTC of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited message The field format is Year Month Day HH MM SS For example 2008 08 20 21 15 03 Display the time passed since the device boot up The device supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server SNTP operates only as a client and cannot provide time services to other systems 92 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R It is recommended that you research any time server selection to ensure that it can meet your specific time server requirements Any NTP time server selection should be evaluated to determine if the server in question meets your specific time server requirements For more detail about the Time Server and Time Server List please refer to the following URL Note http ntp isc org bin view Servers WebHome http ntp isc org bin view Servers NTPPoolServers http support microsoft com kb 262680 en us 4 2 5 WEB Firmware Upgrade The Web Firmware Upgrade page contains fields for downloading system image files from the Local File browser to the device The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 2 5 appears Firmware Update Browse Upto Figure 4 2 5 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot To open Firmware Upgrade screen pe
220. mitation or power issue and you wish to stack all the switches in different racks use long stack cables CB STX200 to connect two stacks 5 l l Figure 2 21 Separated Stack connection 35 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device work station or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements Workstations of subscribers running Windows 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP MAC OSS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card Serial Port connect Terminal e Above PC with COM Port DB 9 RS 232 or USB to RS 232 converter Ethernet Port connect e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 6 0 or above to access Managed
221. n RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below pe Meaning MS Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present o oe Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 HN Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave 134
222. n on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands 305 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 7 Tag Priory Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection be
223. n to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 109 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R LAN IL Portcast 19 A Port 3 Bridge ID 15 Port 1 Port 2 Portcast 4 gt 4 Portcast 4 Portcast 4 Portcast 4 Bone Cr Bridge ID ts Bridge ID 20 Port 2 Pota e Portcast 19 Port2 Pon 3 Portcast 19 Portcast 19 1 LAN 2 1 1 LAN 3 Figure 4 7 5 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used LAN IL A mm Root Bridge Port 1 Port 2 Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port B Port 1 C Port 1 A Designated Bridge r amp lt LAN 2 A LN 3 he Figure 4 7 6 After Applying the S
224. naged Switch 00 30 4f 24 24 c1 4 v es 3 PLANET SGSW 24040 Managed Switch O Start Master Election Figure 4 16 14 The result after master election Step 6 After the Stack Master and Members have been configured any switch in the stack can be managed from the web agent by choosing the desired Member ID from the Switch drop down menu Y PLANET Rete pring here ereieops Switch TtM Switch 1 M Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 mn rags On gt VLAN Spanning Tree Multicast Figure 4 16 15 To manage the member switch Slave switch IP will be covered by Master one and disappear temporarily The slave IP address can be the same as Master IP address Thus if master switch is malfunction you can still access the other switch by same IP address If you have difficulty on selecting another switch you may be connecting to the slave switch s web please close the browser window use the arp d DOS command to clear the ARP table and then reopen the web 207 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 9 COMMAND LINE INTERFACE 5 1 Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system
225. nd click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted 1 Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the Managed Switch 2 The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 e Note E Example 3 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it 1 Click System File Management Copy Operation 2 Select tftp to startup config as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server 3 Enter the file name of the configuration file to download select a file on the Managed Switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and click Apply 4 Reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tftp to startup config TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 0 52 Source File Name startup_sample cf O Factory_Default_Config cfg Y Startup File Name startup_sample cf Figur
226. nd multicast frames Policy 3 for server ports Common server access only DHCP FTP Mail and WEB server Policy 4 for network ports Limit the allowed rate of TCP SYN flooding and ICMP flooding Policy 5 for guest ports Internet access only The screen in Figure 4 11 3 appears Set up Policy Rules Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Gue Policy 2 for client ports Limit the allowed rate of broadcast and multicast frai Policy 3 for server ports Common server access only DHCP FTP Mail and WEB Policy 4 for network ports Limit the allowed rate of TCP SYN flooding and ICMP fl Policy 5 for quest ports Internet access only To continue click Next Cancel Wizard Figure 4 11 3 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot 169 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 3 2 Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 11 4 appears Set up Port Policies for Switch i Group ports into several categories according to different ACL policies for example Client ports work stations laptops Server ports DHCP Web file server Network ports routers switches and Guest ports laptops with Internet access only LLL ZA ro 121715115 10 2 00 arpoajapapa 1 Defaut Q QO
227. nd the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 69 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R to 126 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are e any Accepted any security model v1 v2c usm e v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 e v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c e usm User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are e NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy e Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy e Auth Priv Authentication and privacy e Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 e Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 4 3 5 2 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 5 appears SNMPv3 Communities Configuration public ETT private DoDD DoDD Add new community Figure 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot
228. nformation The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 6 1 appears VLAN Basic Information VLAN Mode Por Based Maximum LAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 4000 Current Number of YLANs LAN Learning Contigurable PYID Tagging Figure 4 6 1 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch a Port Based E IEEE 802 1Q VLAN e Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch e Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch Supported VLANs e Current number of Display the current number of VLANs VLANs e VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vlan learning 98 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 6 4 VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch M IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an
229. ng and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these USES IGMP Querier IMAP A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server 300 IPMC LACP LLDP User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address
230. ng of switches thereby providing redundant forwarding paths Figure 4 16 2 Ring Stack topology a Back to Back Stack Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports Figure 4 16 3 Back to back Stack topology 197 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 16 1 Stack This section provides information for understand stacking architecture include the below items a Switch IDs e Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs e Removing a Switch From the Stack e Replacing a Switch e General Switch ID Assignment Rules a Master Election E Stack Redundancy E Shortest Path Forwarding 4 16 1 1 Switch IDs The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a SGSW Switch E Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs When a switch is added to the stack a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch The automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch The Switch IDs of two switches can be swapped by simply interchanging the values in the Switch ID column Changing Switch IDs does not result in any interruption of the stack operation E Removing a Switch From the Stack When a switch is removed from the stack the configuration for the switch is preserved and the switch still appears on the Stack Configuration page If the configuration of the switch is not
231. nt of the Managed Switch Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A 26 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Step5 Supply power to the Managed Switch Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follows the instructions described below Step1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 11 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch Figure 2 11 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitab
232. ntication is globally disabled Link Down 802 1X or MAC based authentication is enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is authorized This is the case when 802 1X authentication is enabled the port has link and the Admin State is Auto and the supplicant is authenticated or the Admin State is Authorized Unauthorized The port is unauthorized This is the case when 802 1X authentication is enabled the port has link and the Admin State is Auto but the supplicant is not yet authenticated or the Admin State is Unauthorized X Auth Y Unauth X clients are currently authorized and Y are unauthorized This state is shown when 802 1X and MAC based authentication is globally enabled and the Admin State is set to MAC Based This setting applies to ports running MAC based authentication only The maximum number of clients allowed on a given port can be configured through the list box and edit control for this setting Choosing the value All from the list box allows the port to consume up to 104 client state machines Choosing the value Specific from the list box opens up for entering a specific number of maximum clients on the port 1 to 104 147 e Restart User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The stackswitch is born with a pool of state machines from which all ports draw whenever a new client is seen on the port When a given port s maximum is reached both
233. om address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 7 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability How ever the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to signifi cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respectiv
234. om one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later Q PLANET WGSW 24040 I System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation gt VLAN Spanning Tree Welcome to PLANET t Multicast gt Qos WGSW 24040 802 1X Authentication Access Control List z gt MAC Address Table 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP t LLDP gt Diagnostics Management Switch Security PLANET Technology Corporation 11F No 96 Min Chuan Road Hsin Tien Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 aplanet com tw Copyright c 2008 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 4 Web main screen of Managed Switch 39 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 3 5 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read
235. on Power Requirement DC Range 30 60V Range 30 60V Stacking Bandwith bps Fuk Dupo Stack ID Display a Segment LED Display 1 9 A F 0 Layer 2 function System Configuration Console Telnet Web Browser SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto Port Status negotiation status trunk status 802 1Q Tagged Based VLAN up to 4K VLAN groups VLAN Q in Q Private VLAN 17 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R IEEE 802 3ad LACP Static Trunk Port trunking Support 8 groups of 8 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority DS TOS field in IP Packet IGMP v1 v2 Snooping up to 8K multicast Groups IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier mode support IP Based ACL MAC Based ACL Access Control List Up to 256 entries RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE I
236. on is included in LLDP information transmitted Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address 190 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 14 3 LLDP Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor screen in Figure 4 14 3 appears LLDP Neighbor Information for Switch 1 Local Port Chassis ID Remote Port ID System Name Port Description System Capabilities Management Address Port 10 00 30 4F 24 04 5B 2 WGSW 24040 Port 2 Bridge 192 168 0 100 IPv4 Port 11 00 30 4F 10 22 F 1 00 304F 10 22 F3 SGSW 2840 Et
237. on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP 299 ICMP User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its r
238. onse from the target Policer A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue POP3 POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file Server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both Private VLAN In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted AVLAN can be configured as a private VLAN QCE QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID 303 User s Manual of WGSW
239. onse protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public 4 3 2 SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page 65 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 1 appears Object e Mode e Version e Read Community e Write Community Engine ID SNMP System Configuration Mode Disabled Version sold ha w w Read Community Figure 4 3 1 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot Description Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are e Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation e Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are e SNMP v1 Set SNMP sup
240. ontained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Preamble Destination Source VLAN TAG Ethernet Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1517 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated 95 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Adar Src Adar Length E type Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Src Addr E type Length E type New CRC New Tagged Packet Priority CFI VLAN ID M Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying th
241. or port SWITCH gt rstp edge 1 disable RSTP P2P Description Set or show the RSTP point2point parameter Syntax RSTP P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto 248 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable RSTP point2point disable Disable RSTP point2point auto Automatic RSTP point2point detection Default Setting Auto Example Enable RSTP P2P mode for port1 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SwITCHI gt rstp p2p 1 enable RSTP Status Description Show RSTP status Syntax RSTP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show RSTP status SWITCH gt rstp status 32771 00 30 4f 24 24 c1 32771 00 30 4f 24 24 c1 Root Cost 0 Topology Flag Steady Port Port Role State Path Cost Disabled Disabled 249 RSTP Statistics Description Show RSTP statistics Syntax RSTP Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports RSTP mCheck Description Set the RSTP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax RSTP Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 250 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGS
242. ot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status Mi Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port E Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again MM 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Mi Switch does not power up Solution dl AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power 293 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Mi Stacking not functioning Solut
243. otocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request resp
244. plex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 Table 4 7 3 Default STP Path Costs 115 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 7 4 RSTP Port Status This page displays the RSTP port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The RSTP Port Status screen in Figure 4 7 10 appears RSTP Port Status 1 2 3 4 5 E Fl o 4 Auto refresh L Figure 4 7 10 RSTP Port Status page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port e Role The current RSTP port role The port role can be one of the following values e Disabled e Alternate e Backup e Root Designated e Non STP 116 e State e Bridge 4 7 5 RSTP Port Statistics User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The current RSTP port state The port state can be one of the following values e Disabled e Blocking e Learning e Forwarding e Non STP The RSTP Bridge instance VLAN ID This is also a link to the RSTP Detailed Bridge Status if the port is RSTP enabled This page displays the RSTP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The RSTP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 7 11 appears RSTP Statistics Mo ports enabled gt ste ste ren ste stp ren unknown meg
245. point Disabled Auto RSTP SysPrio Description Set or show the RSTP system priority Syntax RSTP SysPrio lt sys_prio gt Parameters lt sys_prio gt RSTP system priority 0 4096 8192 57344 61440 244 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Default Setting 32768 Example Set RSTP system priority value in 4096 SwITCHI gt rstp sysprio 4096 RSTP Age Description Set or show the RSTP maximum age Syntax RSTP Age lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt RSTP maximum age time 6 200 Default Setting 20 Example Set RSTP maximum age time in 200 SWITCH gt rstp age 200 RSTP Delay Description Set or show the RSTP forward delay Syntax RSTP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt RSTP forward delay 4 30 Default Setting 245 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 15 Example Set RSTP forward delay value in 25 SwITCHI gt rstp delay 25 RSTP Version Description Set or show the RSTP protocol version Syntax RSTP Version compatible normal Parameters compatible Compatible with STP normal RSTP Default Setting Normal Example Change RSTP version in compatible SWITCH gt rstp version compatible RSTP Mode Description Set or show the RSTP mode Syntax RSTP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Paramete
246. port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members A VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs 102 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 6 6 Private VLAN Configuration Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other For private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall
247. port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged WE Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default MM Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more 96 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tag
248. ported version 1 e SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c e SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associated with SNMPv3 communities table Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associated with SNMPv3 communities table Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users 66 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 3 3 SNMP System Information Configuration The switch system information is provided here The System Information Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 2 appears System Information Configuration System Name WiGioawe 24040 Figure 4 3 2 System Information Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Contact The textu
249. pports Internet Explorer 6 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE6 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the WGSW SGSW Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC WGSW SGSW Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser IP Address E p UTP Cable 192 168 0 100 CLA IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 4 1 1 Web Management 42 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Logging on the switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 6 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 1
250. previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for these ACEs and then select the action rate limiter 1D logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selections Disabled Disabled Figure 4 11 6 XXXXXXX page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Ingress Port Select the ingress port to which this ACE applies e Any The ACE applies to any port e Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port e Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 172 e Switch e Action e Rate Limiter e Logging e Shutdown User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R through 8 Select the switch to which this ACE applies e Any The ACE applies to any port e Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE e Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation e Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are e Enabled Frames matching the ACE are store
251. r entering a TCP UDP source value appears e Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that 166 TCP UDP Source Range TCP UDP Destination Filter TCP UDP Destination Number TCP UDP Destination Range TCP FIN TCP SYN TCP PSH TCP ACK TCP URG User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE e Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care e Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears e Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears When Specific i
252. rames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time 4 12 1 MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 12 1 appears MAC Address Table Configuration Disable Automatic Aging L Age Time 10 1000000 sec Figure 4 12 1 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot Aging Configuration Object Description e Disable Automatic Enables disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds 181 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 12 2 Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack and not per switch The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and
253. rate limiter in 1kpps User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R swircHi gt qos storm multicast enable 1k QoS Broadcast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Broadcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable broadcast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable broadcast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm broadcast enable 1k User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 8 802 1x Port Access Control Command Dot1x Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Dot1x Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IEEE802 1x status of port SWITCH gt dot1x configuration 1 Mode Disabled RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 RADIUS Secret Reauthentication Disabled 3600 Hold Time Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID Authorized 802 1X Disabled Dotx1 Mode Description Set or show the 802 1X mode for the switch Syntax Dot1x Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable 802 1X 265 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R disable Disable 802 1X default Show 802 1X mode
254. requests O Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client O BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment O Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP O SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol O LLDP Protocol gt Stacking O Hardware stack up to 16 units and 384 ports O Stacking architecture supports Chain and Ring mode O Mirror across stack O Link Aggregation groups spanning multiple switches in a stack O Hardware learning with MAC table synchronization across stack gt Redundant Power System WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040R O 100 240V AC 48V DC Dual power redundant O Active active redundant power failure protection O Backup of catastrophic power failure on one supply O Fault tolerance and resilience 16 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 1 5 Product Specification Pr WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Hardware Specification 24 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports CT O CEN E er e IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex Jumbo Frame Frame 10Kbytes Power Link Act and speed per Gigabit Power Stack Master Stack Port LNK Link Act and speed per Gigabit port Max 30 watts Max 30 watts Max 30 2 watts Max 30 2 watts 102 BTU 102 BTU 102 98 BTU 102 98 BTU AC 100 240V AC 100 240V AC 100 240V AC 100 240V Power Requirement AC 50 60Hz 50 60Hz 50 60Hz 50 60Hz 48V DC 0 6A 48V DC 0 6A Power Consumpti
255. rform the folling 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 5 3 Click the Browse button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware 4 Select on the firmware then click Upload the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software be loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears Click the Yes button to activate the new software immediately The system will load the new software after reboot Software successfully loaded Do you want to activate new software All setting will be clear Figure 4 2 6 Software successfully loaded notice screen 53 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 2 6 TF TP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The screen in Figure 4 2 7 appears TFTP Firmware Update as Upgrade Figure 4 2 7 TFTP Firmware Update page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Filename The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters e Upgrade button Press the button for upgrade the s
256. rs lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations enable Enable RSTP protocol disable Disable RSTP protocol 246 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Default Setting Disable Example Enable rstp mode for port SwITCHI gt rstp mode 1 enable RSTP Cost Description Set or show the RSTP path cost Syntax RSTP Cost lt port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt RSTP path cost 1 2000000000 or auto Default Setting Auto Example Set RSTP cost value in 1 for port SWITCH gt rstp cost 1 1 RSTP Priority Description Set or show the RSTP priority Syntax RSTP Priority lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations 247 lt priority gt RSTP priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default Setting 128 Example Set RSTP priority value in 16 for port1 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH priority 1 16 RSTP Edge Description Set or show the RSTP edge parameter Syntax RSTP Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable RSTP edge disable Disable RSTP edge Default Setting Enable Example Disable RSTP edge parameter f
257. rvice COMMAN lA ad 257 COS SONO id dr en eR fe al dde noo do 257 o gee en ee ae eee te nee ee E ee ee 257 dos ID AU ose seen todita ti alas batas 257 A eee oe a ee cc ee Nd oe oe a OL 258 doS OC Le ROM scars a io cai 258 dos CP hh hace ae casas a o uae eeaalee 259 oo EL De ri RCT ESM Seen eee ee ee Pee Senne A eee ee ee eke ar ee ne eee 260 ROS IG LOOKUP A ne ee 260 OS Moderne di dl li to dl el dio los ad ee Oat 261 A Oe Tee ete Neer ee ene en er eee eee eee eee ere ener rere 261 OOS Rate Limite ssrece te tics these ae sds eine ri 261 QOS A ae awe aoe eee ae Be se aa ees 262 AAA ee ee ts 263 COS MIC o sn Ree Senne e e ell pod li 263 An A A eee 264 6 8 802 1x Port Access Control Command coooonnccccconnanconennnancnnnnnonanennnonannnrrrnnna nan rrrrnnannnrrrnnannrrrrnnannrerrrnananass 265 DOtIX COMMOUN ALO Ms si A aeaneeeneeees 265 OIG MOS a tos at 265 BOOS ida 266 A earache cea gts ec aa ec A A O 266 DOS ces 267 OUI UNG NN 267 DONX RE AUIMSRIG ALON Jcocacsactectieceritientevilelcelinecegtanasha ceeds ias 268 DOR CVO A E 268 DOU TI TIMO Usa AS RR 269 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R DORE Sta USOS cuero putsrusil evel uted count stil sie lacio memes acted wu deere hastens eck rernai telat 269 A O ermere a earns nen ee nee ntrmreeT eeme nares nt rere 270 DOUX POSTING acca a ene A aerate tan oe te eee hs ae aca 270 DOL wccceaericsyeas a a eae eve vase nse eet oe ees eect de eee eee 271 6 9 Access Control LI
258. s 123 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Set up Policy Rules for Switch 1 Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies Port Members E Mal Pal EJ Ll H y 21 OO0O0000000 O 0O O 0O 0 O OO OO 0o0o0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 0o0o0o0oo0o0oo0ooo oOo0o00 0000 Ooo000000 oe 6 elie tele fete ic Oo900 00000 OVWO0000 00 000000000 e 1 k amp Figure 4 8 6 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot The page includes the folling fileds Object Description e QCLID Frames that hit this QCE are set to match this specific QCL e Port Members A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each QCL ID To include a port in a QCL member click the radio button Once the QCL configuration wizard is finished the below screen appears Finished The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use Click Finish to get more information Click Wizard Again to start the wizard again 124 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 8 4 2 Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control A STEP 1 Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up t
259. s E Port Configuration Configures port connection settings E Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics E Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 4 4 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 4 1 appears Port Configuration Total Power Usage 43 ee rr Speed Flow Control Maximum O 1 Down Auto x x Power Control Lu uo moo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo uo aa mo an uo uo uo Az oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo o oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo oo ao ao o o o o ao o ao ao a o o o ao ao ao o o ao Excessive Collision Mode Configured En Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 92 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41 Enabled Discard 41
260. s Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over MAC Table Columns Object Description e Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry 183 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals
261. s e Sender IP Mask e Target IP Filter e Target IP Address e Target IP Mask e ARP SMAC Match e RARP SMAC Match Description Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE e Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care e ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP e RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP e Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE e Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care e Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set e Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE e Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care e Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears e Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE e Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care e Host Target IP filter is set to Host Spe
262. s 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit COM1 Properties Port Settings Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Restore Defaults Figure 3 2 Terminal parameter settings You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 38 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 3 4 Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch WGSW SGSW Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Browser IP Address AA O UTP Cable 192 168 0 100 ky IP Address 192 168 0 x Figure 3 3 Web management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters fr
263. s according to different ACL policies Set up Typical Network Application Rules set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding strictly control the network traffic by only allowing Incoming frames that match the source MAC and source IP on specific ports Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules set up the specific ACL to detect Dos attack To continue click Next Figure 4 11 2 welcome to the ACL Configuration wizard page screenshot 168 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object e Set up Policy Rules e Set up Port Policies e Set up Typical Network Application Rules e Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding e Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules 4 11 3 1 Set up Policy Rules Description Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source IP and source MAC on specific port Set up the specific ACL to detect DoS attack Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Policy 2 for client ports Limit the allowed rate of broadcast a
264. s selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE e 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry e 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE e 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry e 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE e 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry e 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE e 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry e 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry
265. s to the specific ACE The common servers are DHCP DNS FTP HTTP IMAP NFS POP3 SAMBA SMTP TELNET TFTP e Instant Messaging Indicates the instant messaging service that applies to the specific ACE The instant messengers are Google Talk MSN Messenger Yahoo Messenger e User Definition Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific ACE The user definitions are e Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this ACE The allowed range is 0x600 to OxXFFFF e UDP Port Specify the UDP destination port filter for this ACE The allowed range is 0 to 65535 e TCP Port Specify the TCP destination port filter for this ACE The allowed 171 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R range is 0 to 65535 e Others Indicates the other application that applies to the specific ACE The other applications are HTTPS ICMP Multicast IP Stream NetBIOS PING Request Ping Reply SNMP SNMP Traps a STEP 2 Define and Apply the Typeical Netowrk Application Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for the ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The screen in Figure 4 11 6 appears Set up Typical Network Application Rules According to your decision on the
266. s where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry e Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify the source IP filter for this ACE e Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care e Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears e Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE e Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care e Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears e Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP 165 e DIP Address e DIP Mask ICMP Parameters Object e ICMP Type Filter e ICMP Type Value e ICMP Code Filter e ICMP Code Value TCP UDP Parameters Object e TCP UDP Source Filter e TCP UDP Source No User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear When Host or
267. sable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable VID 1 SWITCH gt igmp state 1 disable IGMP Querier Description Set or show the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IGMP Querier lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP querier disable Disable IGMP querier default Show IGMP querier mode Default Setting Disable Example SWITCH gt igmp querier 1 enable IGMP Fast Leave Description Set or show the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode Syntax 253 IGMP Fastleave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP fast leave disable Disable IGMP fast leave default Show IGMP fast leave mode Default Setting Disable Example User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R SWITCH gt igmp fastleave 1 enable IGMP Router Description Set or show the IGMP snooping router port mode Syntax IGMP Router lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP router port disable Disable IGMP router port default Show IGMP router port mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable IGMP snooping function for port1 4 SWITCH gt igmp router 1 4 en
268. sts ToSupplicant that the RADIUS server chose an EAP method MAC based Not applicable 152 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R MAC based Counts all the RADIUS packets sent from the switch towards the RADIUS server for a given port left most table or client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted E Last Supplicant Client Info For MAC based ports this section is embedded in the RADIUS counter s section Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate Last Supplicant Client Info Name me tam OOOO Port based The protocol version number carried in the most recently received dot1xAuthLastEapolFrame Version EAPOL frame Version MAC based Not applicable Port based The source MAC address carried in the most recently received dot1xAuthLastEapolFrame Source EAPOL frame Source MAC based Not applicable Port based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Resp ID EAPOL frame MAC based The MAC address of the last client that attempted to authenticate Identity or Last Client left most table or the MAC address of the currently selected client right most table Clients attached to this port This table is only available for MAC based ports Each row in the table represents a MAC based client on the port and there are three parameters for each client e MAC Address Sho
269. t Show port VLAN ID Default Setting 1 Example Set PVID2 for port20 SWITCH gt vlan pvid 20 2 VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only 238 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port20 that allow tagged frames only swircHvien frametype 20 tagged VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port20 SWITCH gt vlan ingressfilter 20 enable VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged 239 Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for port2 User s Manu
270. t matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS class for the port The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The Port QoS Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 3 appears 121 Default Class i z 3 z E Low w El Low w 5 10 Low w The page includes the following fields e QCL e User Priority e Queuing Mode e Queue Weighted oe Queue Weighted OCL User Priority Queuing Mode O 4 4 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Port QoS Configuration Low Normal Medium High Mey ao e 0 2 4 Figure 4 8 3 Port QoS Configuration page screenshot Description Configure the number of traffic classes as 1 2 or 4 The default value is 4 The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Configure the default QoS class for the port that is the QoS class for frames not matching any of the QCEs in the QCL Select which QCL to use for the port Select the default user priority for this port when adding a Tag to the untagged frames Select which Queuing mode for this port Setting Queue weighted Low Normal Medium High if the Queuing Mode is Weighted 22 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 8 4 QCL Configuration Wizard This handy wizard helps you set up a QCL quickly The QCL Configuration Wizard screen in Figure
271. tatus page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down e Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs e Partner System ID The partners System ID MAC address e Partner Port The partners port number connected to this port 91 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 5 5 LACP statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP statistics screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears LACP Port Statistics mort LACP LACP Transmitted Received Unknown Illegal 0 O 00 4 50 ME to ham SOS Om Om Om Om Om Om Om Om Oa CO ao SOS Om Om Om Om Om Oe Om Om Om CO ao SoS OS OS OS Ome OBS OS Ome Oe OS oO eo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ll 0 0 Ll 0 Ll Auto refresh 1 Figure 4 5 7 LACP Port statistics page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number e LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port e LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port e Discarded Shows how many unknown or
272. tch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments MDI Media Dependant Interface RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Media Dependant Interface Cross ne wots OO The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3DE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Sve 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange
273. tes this switch from the stack configuration e Stack Member The MAC address of the switch e Switch ID The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a switch For more information see description of Switch IDs e Master Capable Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master An unmanaged switch for example will not be Master Capable e Master Priority The priority that the switch has in the master election process The smaller the priority the more likely the switch will become master during the master election process e Switch Type The product name of the switch e Start Master Election By checking this option the Save operation will also start the master election process This is done by clicking Start Master Election followed by Save This causes the first two criteria to be ignored thereby basing master election only on master priority and MAC address When master election is enforced the first two criteria are ignored for a period of 10 15 seconds On the Stack State Monitor web page this is shown by Reelect being set to Yes for one of the switches in the stack 201 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 16 3 Stack Information This page provides an overview of the stack topology as detected by SPROUT m Stack Topology The Stack Topology screen in Figure 4 16 7 appears Stack Topology Stack Topology Chain Stack Member Count 4 Last Topology Change 1970 01 01 00 00 01 00
274. the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list E Deletes the QCE E The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL 4 8 2 1 QoS Control Entry Configuration Configure a new QoS Control Entry on this page a Frames can be classified by up to 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QCL assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS Class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 2 appears QCE Configuration Ethernet Type Y Ethernet Type _ VLAN ID TCP UDP Port DSCP ToS Tag Priomty Save Reset Cancel Ethernet Type Value Traffic Class Figure 4 8 2 QCE Configuration page screenshot 120 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The page includes the following fields Object Description e QCE Type Select the available type for the specific QCE e Ethernet Type Matches the received frame s EtherType against the QCE Key e VLAN ID Matches the frame s VID against the QCE Key e TCP UDP Port Matches the destination port and the source port against the QCE Key e DSCP Matches th
275. the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Enable or disable the port shaper The default value is Disabled Configure the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps Configure the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps 130 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 8 7 Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There three types of storm rate control a Unicast storm rate control a Multicast storm rate control Ml Broadcast storm rate control The rate is 24n where n is equal to or less than 15 or No Limit The unit of the rate can be either pps packets per second or kpps kilopackets per second The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 8 14 appears Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Rate pps Unicast Multicast gt Broadcast F Figure 4 8 14 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here e unicast e multicast e broad
276. them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client E Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EA
277. ting 4 Example Set QoS classes 2 SWITCH gt qos classes 2 QoS Default Description Set or show the default port priority Syntax QoS Default lt port_list gt lt class gt 257 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 Default Setting Low Example Set high priority for port5 swircHi gt aos default 5 high QoS Tag Priority Description Set or show the port VLAN tag priority Syntax QoS Tagprio lt port_list gt lt tag_prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set priority7 for VLAN3 SWITCH gt qos tagprio 3 7 QoS QCL Port Description Set or show the port QCL ID Syntax 258 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R QoS QCL Port lt port_list gt lt gcl_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt gcl_id gt QCLID Default Setting 1 Example Set QCL ID5 for port10 swircHqos qcl port 10 5 QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE
278. tistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port RxFrames TxFrames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal 235 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 236 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R 6 4 VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 SWITCH gt vlan configuration 1 Mode IEEE 802 1Q Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased Port Based VLAN Mode dotiq 802 1Q VLAN Mode Default Setting Q in Q Mode Eth type Disable 237 SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Dot1q Example Set VLAN mode in port base swircHvien mode portbased VLAV PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none defaul
279. to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware 3 The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 104 VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items e IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Enable IEEE 802 1Q Tag based VLAN group E IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Enables 802 1Q QinQ Tunneling o Private VLAN Creates removes primary or community VLANs 93 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 6 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail
280. tween TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the Pv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 306 UDP User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TLV is short for Type Length Value UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that
281. uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority V VLAN User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 1Q frame Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members o
282. value The number of organizationally TLVs received Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented 193 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 15 Network Diagnastics 4 15 1 Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Cable Diagnostics for Switch 1 Port s Pate stats SSCS S Figure 4 15 1 Cable Diagnostics page screenshot Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair
283. witch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 13 appears ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate pps 1 1 Figure 4 11 13 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter 1D for the settings contained in the same row e Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps 178 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 11 5 ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 11 14 appears ACL Ports Configuration Port Port Copy Logging Shutdown cu P Tt rD i Policy ID ID Action i 4 o lt elele lt elele lt cele O MA O BN O A CO AA O AA O PB O Maa lt Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
284. witch firmware To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling 1 Click System gt TFTP Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 2 7 3 Fill in the TFTP server IP Address and the firmware file name click the Upgrade button of the main page the system would pop up the confirm message Microsoft Internet Explorer Are you sure to start TFTP firmware upgrade Ss Please check the TFTP server 192 168 0 52 is reachable The file Fw C28105_v10b080215 img is the correct Firmware Filename on TFTP server Cancel 54 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R Figure 4 2 8 TFTP Firmware upgrade pop up message Microsoft Internet Explorer A Please wait For the firmware upgrade process complete Figure 4 2 9 Firmware Upgrade pop up message Click OK the Switch will start the TFTP upgrade procedure Please check your TFTP server application to confirm the TFTP file is well transmit to the Switch The Switch will reboot then and It will cost 2 to 3 minutes for the TFTP firmware upgrade and reboot procedure Please wait for the process complete Once the new software is loaded to the system successfully the Login screen appears Enter the user name and password to login the Switch DO NOT Power OFF the switch until the update progress is complete Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the OK button after th
285. wo ewe ee a ee ee ce ste emcee des eee wcesaten eee ee 238 VEAN Frame De O aah ha ned A eee ha a 238 VEAN MOSS Fla 239 A A E 239 VEAN O AIN O MOO Erosia e a anaa a a lalalala 240 VEAN EME EI De A 240 A Add Sarasa ar et eA en ree Te ee 241 e A o te idbaueeteautel sated 241 VEAN TSO OND ad dia 242 PYEAN Contigua ON a a ao a tn o o no O O 243 PVEAN TSOA lE sce so ceric ssestte anes E a E a a eect aan ane anaes 243 6 5 Spanning tree Protocol Command aiii aio iio 244 Ro PGOU ON ss A daa 244 A ara ane lee nent ty sont AE amen mw Rae wT nnt Pia ae reenter 244 RIP AAA Pe RE A er O ne er emer ne erent ree ne ere 245 RSTP Delay rae ta dt li EE 245 ROSTOV diia 246 A ne Pane 246 FS Muros 247 A A a ee 247 FR i Oe es at ets apnea atc o 248 Rood cad aad sae ane nee ee A Tn me aerate 248 RTP SA S gee messes R E ets R A E ctse nie dace nessaenceee 249 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R o e RE o tse ckehe ternal ele 250 ROTE WN SC raters sesame els ote a teed abs aut tast a to antteaer au tastten a hates amned bataeeu oman eaters atges 250 6 6 Multicast Configuration Command sncicocionionnnai adi id id 251 SMP CSONIguUra ON A a 251 IGMP MOJE a E A 251 IGMP SUS na ae dls 252 TE AS O 252 IOMP QUEE eaea A e a a 253 IGMP Fast ES eins A AAA A A eaten west 253 EMPRO Mati ida 254 E A O O a ae ent eno 259 OMP OTOU Tari rio anatase ese aoe 255 IGMP Stats ee ee aera ene ote eee eT er eee eee ene 255 6 7 Quality of Se
286. worked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation
287. ws the MAC address of the client which is also used as the password in theauthentication process against the RADIUS server Clicking the link causes the client s RADIUS counters to be shown in the right most RADIUS counters table above If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached e State Shows whether the client is authorized or unauthorized As long as the RADIUS server hasn t successfully authenticated a client it is unauthorized Last Authentication Show the date and time of the last authentication of the client This gets updated for every re authentication of the client 153 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R 4 10 6 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration 1 Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the switch RADIUS server 12345678 at this case TT CT x Cert Information Specity information regarding he client Client addiess IP or ONS 192 166 0 100 Verity Clientendor RADIUS Standard ma T Client must always send the signature attribute in he request Shared secret je Conhrm shared secret E Back Cancel Figure 4 10 7 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting 2 Configure ports attribute of 802 1X the same as 802 1X Port Configuration
288. y engine ID mode of operation Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled 4 3 5 SNMPv3 Configuration 4 3 5 1 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page The entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration screen in Figure 4 3 4 appears SNMPvs Accesses Configuration Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name LI default ro_ group default rw group any Noth NoPriv eT a any WoAuth NoPriw defeutt_view i VIEW W default view IEW Figure 4 3 4 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Delete e Group Name Description Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 a
289. ystem as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation soeed Duplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregared selected ports to be a trounk group z Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Link Aggregation 4 ports aggregate up to 4Gbps Figure 4 5 1 Link Aggregation 85 User s Manual of WGSW 24040 WGSW 24040R SGSW 24040 SGSW 24040R The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devic

Planet Technology SGSW-24040R User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents